JP6935144B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which when a gaming ball wins a prize at a starting port in a normal gaming state, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win, and the combination of symbols according to the lottery result is stopped.

When the result of the lottery is a win, the winning symbol combination is displayed and a winning game state is generated.

JP-A-2018-8117

Although some measures have been taken to suppress the decline in interest by performing the production, there is still room for further improvement in the production.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the production is devised.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention adopts the following configuration. A lottery means for performing a lottery regarding a hit based on the establishment of a start condition, a special symbol change execution means for executing a special symbol change based on the establishment of a start condition, an effect execution means for controlling the execution of an effect, and a light emitting unit. The effect executing means provides a stop effect of the decorative symbol by using a temporary stop effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol and a definite display effect executed while the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The provisional stop effect is controlled, and the light emitting unit is not emitted during the period from the timing when the temporary stop effect is changed to the final display effect until the first time elapses, and the temporary stop effect is after the period until the first time elapses is completed. It is possible to make the light emitting unit emit light in a state where the final display effect has passed for a second time from the timing from the stop effect to the final display effect, and in the period until the first time elapses, the light emitting unit can emit light. wherein are those decorative pattern continues to confirm stopped, the light emitting portion from the timing became the confirmation display effect from the temporary stop demonstration emitted upon lapse of the second period of time, the confirmation display effect from the temporary stop demonstration change to a different light emission mode from the third time elapsed lighting mode when the confirmation display effect has elapsed from the timing became the confirmation display effect in a state where running second time emission is started from the timing became A state in which the final display effect has been executed for a second time from the timing when the temporary stop effect is changed to the final display effect after the period up to the first time has expired. The gaming machine is characterized in that the amount of light can be adjusted in the machine, and it is possible to mute the sound while the final display effect is being executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the production is devised.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotary drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and looked at from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows in the game area where a game ball is distributed in a game board. It is a front view of a center role and a table production unit in a table unit of a game board. It is a side sectional view seen from the right by cutting the front effect unit together with the center accessory at the center in the left-right direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the LED in the front effect unit, and the reflection concave part of the front light guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the front light guide plate of a table effect unit is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state that the lower front center decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower center elevating base is raised in the lower movable production unit, and the lower front center decorative body and the lower rear center decorative body are made to emit light. In the lower movable production unit, the lower center elevating base, the lower left side elevating base and the lower right side elevating base are raised to emit light from the lower front center decoration, the lower rear center decoration, the lower left side decoration, and the lower right side decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of being made. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position while the game board is in the state of FIG. 108. The four rotating decorative bodies, the left side rotating decorative body, the left sub-side rotating decorative body, the right side rotating decorative body, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body in the lower movable production unit are developed respectively to outline the decoration of the decorative part on each side. It is explanatory drawing. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the type (size) of the arrow which is light-emitting and displays in the lower movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable production unit are lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable production unit roughly from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable production unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable production unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing for hits, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big hit types, and (C) is a small hit type. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process of. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a normal figure hit determination table used for the lottery process for the normal figure hit, and (B) is a normal figure hit open pattern table used for the determination process for the open pattern at the time of hitting the normal figure. be. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary electric accessory opening process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady-state processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. (A) is a hold notice determination table used for determining the hold notice pattern at 1 o'clock on hold, and (B) is a hold notice determination table used for determining the hold notice pattern at 2 o'clock on hold. ) Is a hold notice determination table used for determining the hold notice pattern at 3 o'clock on hold. (D) is a hold notice determination table used for determining the hold notice pattern at 4 o'clock on hold. It is a hold change effect determination table used for determining a hold change effect pattern. This is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of executing the hold movement change effect as the hold change effect. This is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of executing the hold change effect. This is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of executing the billiard hold change effect as the hold change effect. (A) is an over-winning effect determination table at 1, 3, 5, and 7 o'clock, and (B) is an over-winning effect determination table at 2 o'clock. (C) is an over-winning effect determination table at 4 o'clock, (D) is an over-winning effect determination table at 6 o'clock, and (E) is an over-winning effect determination table. It is a production determination table at the time of over-winning after the number of times of winning = 8. This is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of executing the jackpot game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light guide plate. It is a table which shows an example of a big hit probability and a small hit probability. It is a table which shows an example of the pattern of opening time and closing time of a big winning opening selected in each round of a big hit game or a small hit game. (A) is a table showing an example of the time of the hit start effect (also called an opening effect), and (B) is a table showing an example of the time of the final hit effect (also called an ending effect). It is a table showing an example of the operation schedule of the big winning opening during the big hit game. It is a table showing an example of the operation schedule of the big winning opening during the small hit game. It is an enlarged front view which shows an outline example of the structure in the 1st grand prize opening. It is a timing chart which shows the operation schedule of the movable body in the first big prize opening during a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of a stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the production when the stock can be acquired in the stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the production when the stock can be acquired in the stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the production when the stock could not be acquired in the stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the production when the stock could not be acquired in the stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the production when the stock could not be acquired in the stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the production when the stock could not be acquired in the stock time production. It is a table which shows an example of the fluctuation time of each of the 2nd special symbol fluctuations of the 1st to 5th times since the time saving state started. It is a table which shows an example of the fluctuation time of each of the 2nd special symbol fluctuations of the 6th to 8th times since the time saving state started. This is an example of a variable pattern table selection table. This is an example of a stock time production block table. This is an example of a stock production specific table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the time schedule when a small hit is won due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning in the time saving state, and (B) is the first special symbol corresponding to the winning in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time schedule when a big hit is won by fluctuation. This is an example of a judge production table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the final rock-paper-scissors production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production during a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production during a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect at the time of the end of the change in which the hold charge effect is executed, and the hold of the special figure 2 is not accumulated at all. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect at the time when the hold of the second special figure 2 is accumulated just before the end of the change which the hold charge effect is executed. This is an example of a fixed display time selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the prior instruction effect. (A) is a front view showing an example of a simplified configuration of a pachinko machine equipped with an effect operating lever, and (B) is a left side showing an example of a simplified configuration of a pachinko machine equipped with an effect operating lever. It is a top view. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the judge production using a plurality of operation units. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the judge production using a plurality of operation units. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the internal structure of the 2nd prize opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the internal structure of the 2nd prize opening.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. The control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the game panel 1100. It is equipped with a back unit 3000 that can be attached to. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, which give a predetermined number of game balls B). It has. Obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the front effect unit 2600 and the lower movable effect. The player can be entertained by performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 11a on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. It forms a space 40a. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the front and rear and is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which penetrates the insertion recess 101c in the front-rear direction, are used for the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a key hole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and the rear side of the cylinder body 131, and is inserted into the key hole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the key hole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 In addition, the portion of the taxiing guideway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 by partitioning between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a rotating rod 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a of the ball feeding operating rod 146 is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operating rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 117) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by a shaft or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c slides downward as the operation transmission unit moves downward. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It is possible to prevent the bounce at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in the front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when a fraudulent act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the ball, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and communicates with the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit, and the through ball passage 150a. The through-ball passage 150a is provided with a full-tan ball receiving port 150b which is open to the rear on the lower right side of the front view and can communicate with the full-tan guide path of the lower full-tan ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 was opened upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a even though it was launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball socket 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the dish unit.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled with the game ball B to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. It is provided with a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f to be formed.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is bulged forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting by the player is detected and the handle 182 or the like of the player is subjected to the static electricity. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the plate ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper plate main body 212 is closed near the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically near the left end and a through port 213b penetrating vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And to relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the loaned game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the card.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 extending vertically and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the game ball B can pass through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiing guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The door 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the advance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is moved through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other on the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the lower front end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. NS. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removing lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removing hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removing lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emittingly decorated.

When the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, respectively. Be done. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate cooperate with the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 that is attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the plate can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the inner circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 340. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315, and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper part is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 and opens upward on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 are provided.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 from below, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically and vertically on the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward of the rotating base 332. It is provided with a regulating ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. A plurality of outer and lower cover mounting portions 336b, which are arranged in a plurality of units, are provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type production.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 340, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through port 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a push operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. A pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373, the center button body 373, and the elevating base 364 and urge the center button body 373 upward, and are substantially the same as the center button body 373. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylinder shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is provided with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and is moved up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the push detection sensor 381 for detecting the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating and lowering of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 penetrates vertically in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the central hole 364b near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a cylindrical shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can illuminate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and extends upward from the inner circumference of the annular board portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and the central button main body 373. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height that substantially coincides with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force equal to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decorative board 314, a dish center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, push detection sensor 381, and elevating detection sensor 382 relay the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the columnar central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 becomes an obstacle and the rotation operation becomes difficult. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper end of the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, so that it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded in the door frame left side unit 400.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through-hole 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It includes a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed so that the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be light-emittingly decorated. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (edge of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is the top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends move downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outside of each pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs, respectively.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of these decorative substrates. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer circumference of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side unit 400 door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate. 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer circumference are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be used to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a game board restricting section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the part 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501, which face the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 to the front, are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extension portion 501j that is rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted into a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the above is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 92).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guidance passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guidance passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with each other. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

Because of this, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The front view of the actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball pulling passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and around the axis extending vertically, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is a front view showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls are distributed on the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 100). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so that the mouth 2006 or the like can be accepted or passed through.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100). Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97, 117, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control units (not shown) arranged on the rear side of the 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006, which enable the acceptance of the game ball B depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, It has.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the front view and has two general winning openings 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 which is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 which are attached to the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first prize opening 2005 and a second prize opening 2006.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped opening that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has an open front, and is closed by detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 to the rear wall from the rear side. It is provided with a back box (not shown), a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300 installed in the back box.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. Has been done. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and is recessed upward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings for mounting the front unit 2000 so as to penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder is provided with a through hole that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside is approximately the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. ing.

Further, the panel holder is provided with a notch portion that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 117) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second start port sensor 2511, a first count sensor 2512, a second count sensor 2513, a specific area sensor 2512a, a start port solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid. It is connected to 2515, a second attacker solenoid 2516, a distribution solenoid 2111, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting port sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two normal lottery results for which the shin is drawn by passing the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It includes a normal symbol display made of LEDs and a normal hold display made of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. A lottery was made by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 and the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds (first hold number) related to the acceptance of the game ball B to. From the second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that display the second special lottery result, and the two LEDs that display the number of holds (second hold number) related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special hold number indicator.

Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of at least one of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 ( It is equipped with a round indicator, which consists of five LEDs that display the number of rounds.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 117. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box (not shown) that houses the peripheral control board 1510. , Is equipped. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end has an opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B in at least one of the first special lottery opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. , Is equipped.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at a lower left of the gate portion 2003 and at a height slightly lower than the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The first prize-winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting port 2004 and at a height slightly below the first starting port 2002. The second prize opening 2006 is arranged at a slightly lower position on the left side of the first prize opening 2005.

The table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has one general winning opening 2001 and a first start port 2002, and a start port. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the right end of the front view in the game area 5a with respect to the center in the vertical direction. A gate unit 2300 that is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, which is attached to a slightly upper side in the center of the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, and a transparent front effect unit 2600 attached so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. And have.

The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is arranged at the right end of the front view in the game area 5a at the lower side with respect to the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass one by one in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the lower board holder 1200. It is discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower board holder 1200. Will be done.

Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2511, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005 is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a when it is distributed to a specific area by the distribution member described later, then detected by the first count sensor 2512, and discharged by the distribution member. When it is distributed to the area, it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 without being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second count sensor 2513, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8a. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 101 is a front view of the center accessory and the table effect unit in the table unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. The 3300 and the like can be visually recognized from the front. The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 includes one general winning opening 2001 arranged in the lower right corner of the front view on the outer circumference of the frame, and a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below the general winning opening 2001. (2) It has a first large winning opening 2005 arranged below the starting opening 2004 and a second large winning opening 2006 arranged slightly below the left side of the first large winning opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 can release the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes a warp outlet 2502 that is open in the frame, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). It is formed so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is the lowest when it is attached to 1110). The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest portion in the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game region 5a from this portion. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest portion of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as the height of the second starting port 2004.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 has a second start port sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and a first count that detects the game ball B received in the first grand prize opening 2005. The sensor 2512, the specific area sensor 2512a that detects the game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005 and distributed to the specific area by the distribution member, and the game ball B received in the second prize opening 2006. It includes a second count sensor 2513 for detection (see FIG. 117). Further, the center accessory 2500 has a start port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start. The first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the opening 2004, and the first starting port 2002 or the first. (Ii) The second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the starting port 2004, and the first large winning opening. It is provided with a distribution solenoid 2111 that operates a distribution member that distributes the game ball that won the prize in 2005 to a specific area and a discharge area.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side of the upper surface in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side of the upper surface are the outer circumferences (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a in the front view. A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. Further, in the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are arranged in the lower right corner of the front view. The portion of the lower right corner of the front view extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and forms a space between the portion of the lower right corner and the portion of the upper part of the right side surface. The gate unit 2300 is arranged in the space.

Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B for the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 that are open (open) with a high probability.

[5-8b. Table production unit]
The table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105 and the like. FIG. 102 is a side sectional view of the front effect unit cut at the center in the left-right direction together with the center accessory and viewed from the right. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED in the front effect unit and the reflection recess of the front light guide plate. FIG. 104 is a front view showing a light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 105 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is made to emit light.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the transparent flat plate-shaped front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, the reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the upper surface of the reflector 2620. The center accessory is provided so as to cover the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640, and the reflector 2620 from the front. It includes a front cover 2650 attached to the 2500.

The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed on the back surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate main body 2611 and the light guide plate main body 2611, and is formed from any of a plurality of specific light input portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It has a plurality of fine reflection recesses 2613 that reflect the incident light forward. The plurality of specific light input units 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of the first specific light input unit 2612a, the second specific light input unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light input unit 2612a, the second specific light input unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction). Then, they are arranged in two rounds in order from left to right (the order in which the fourth specific light input unit 2612d is returned to the beginning and becomes the first specific light input unit 2612a).

The reflection recess 2613 has a plane that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. .. The reflection recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. Further, the reflection recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light input unit 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2612, it is reflected by the reflection recess 2613 in the front front (direction perpendicular to the paper surface) of the light guide plate main body 2611. However, the reflective recess 2613 appears to emit light from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light input portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflection recess 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate main body 2611. From the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflection recess 2613 does not appear to emit light.

In the present embodiment, the reflection recess 2613 is recessed in a triangular shape and extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612. It is not limited to the above, and any one extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2612 may be used.

The plurality of reflection recesses 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light input units 2612, and the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a and the second specific light input unit 2612b corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2612a. A plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b corresponding to the above, a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light input unit 2612c, and a plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. It is composed of recesses 2613d and.

Further, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 capable of displaying light emission in different modes from each other by reflecting light forward from the reflection recesses 2613 of a specific group among the plurality of reflection recesses 2613. There is. The plurality of patterns 2614 include a first pattern 2614a composed of only a plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b consisting of only a plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b, and a third pattern 2614b consisting of only a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c. It is composed of a picture 2614c and a fourth picture 2614d composed of only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 104, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentric and circulate in order from the outside to the center (next to the fourth pattern 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. By inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, the reflector 2620 can sandwich the front side and the back side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recess 2621, through holes 2622 penetrating vertically are formed at a portion corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640.

The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 has a strip-like shape extending to the left and right, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on a portion of the lower surface directly above the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to the portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620, respectively. By attaching the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 to the upper surface of the reflector 2620, a plurality of LEDs 2630 are formed so as to face downward through the through holes 2622, respectively.

The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light receiving units 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 include a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light input unit 2612b, and a third specific light input unit 2612c. It is composed of a third LED group 2630c corresponding to the above, and a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide a plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and divide them from left to right. They are arranged in two rounds in order (the order in which the fourth LED group 2630d is returned to the beginning and becomes the first LED group 2630a). In the present embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630.

Next, the light emitting effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the first specific light input portion 2612a into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front at the first reflection recess 2613a, and the remaining second light is reflected. Since the second reflection recess 2613b, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the first reflection recess 2613a can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The first pattern 2614a composed of the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 104 (a)).

When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the second specific light input portion 2612b into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front at the second reflection recess 2613b, and the remaining second light is reflected. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the second reflection recess 2613b can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The second pattern 2614b composed of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 104 (b)).

When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the third specific light input portion 2612c into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front at the third reflection recess 2613c, and the remaining third light is reflected. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the second reflection recess 2613b, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the third reflection recess 2613c can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The third pattern 2614c composed of the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 104 (c)).

When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2612d into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front at the fourth reflection recess 2613d, and the remaining first Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the second reflection recess 2613b, and the third reflection recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front surface, only the fourth reflection recess 2613d can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The fourth pattern 2614d, which is composed of a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d, can emit light (see FIG. 104 (d)).

As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 are arranged in the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED 2630. When the LED group 2630d is made to emit light in this order, the first picture 2614a, the second picture 2614b, the third picture 2614c, and the fourth picture 2614d can be made to emit light in this order, and there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect like an animation.

On the other hand, when a plurality of LEDs 2630 are made to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth LED group 2614d, the third LED group 2614c, and the second LED group 2630a are emitted in this order. The picture 2614b and the first picture 2614a can be made to emit light in this order, and a light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

As described above, according to the table effect unit 2600, since a plurality (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be emitted by one table light guide plate 2610, each pattern can be displayed in an animation or the like. It is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a large space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the effect of the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing movable effects with the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the front light guide plate 2610 causes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 due to point-like light emission of the plurality of reflection recesses 2613 to emerge in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation, it is possible to give a strong impact to a player who is accustomed to the light emitting effect using a conventional light guide plate, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since only the player seated in the front front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 well, other players who are away from the front can see the pattern 2614. The light emission display becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to suppress the attention of other players. At the same time, it is possible to play the game without worrying about other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched between the fixing recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. As a result, each LED 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group 2630c, fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light input unit 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected forward and forward by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably emitted.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is emitted by the LED 2630, it emits light. The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making the game difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is attached by two members as in the conventional case. It is possible to eliminate the rattling between the two LEDs and the light guide plate 2610, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at a desired position with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light input unit 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light input unit 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be emitted. It is possible to reliably display light emission.

Further, since the plurality of specific light input units 2612 are arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. The front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611. Since it is possible to prevent the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the above from being partitioned, the effect image and the like can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. It is possible to entertain in a good state and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and since there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in the front view, the pachinko machine 1 with a feeling of openness can be obtained, and the game area 5a can be obtained. It can be made to look good inside and have an appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be matched by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. And a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 does not exist and surprise him, and to entertain the light emission display of multiple patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and suppress the deterioration of interest. can.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from the player side, it is possible to prevent the reflector 2620 and the like from being visible and the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By making the picture 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not anticipate, and the light emission display of the picture 2614 can be enjoyed, and the player can enjoy the light emission display. It is possible to make people think that there is something good about the game, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by the production by the above, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 By displaying the effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2614 emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the emitted patterns 2614. , It is possible to show the player a production (display production) that can strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the reflection recess 2613 is shown to have a triangular cross section and a constant extension, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross section is a semicircular arc shape and a constant extension, a cross section. May be polygonal and constantly extended, curved in cross section and constantly extended, and the like.

Further, the LED 2630 may be a single color or a full color. Further, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light input portion, the reflection recess, and the LED group can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 116. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower front center decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable effect unit, and FIG. 107 shows the lower front center decorative body and the lower front center decorative body by raising the lower center elevating base in the lower movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the lower rear center decorative body is made to emit light, and FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the central decoration body, the lower rear center decoration body, the lower left side decoration body, and the lower right side decoration in a state where light is emitted. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the gaming board is in the state of FIG. 108 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. Further, in FIG. 110, four rotating decorative bodies, a left side rotating decorative body, a left sub-side rotating decorative body, a right side rotating decorative body, and a right sub-side rotating decorative body in the lower movable effect unit are developed, and the decorative portions on each side are developed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the type (size) of the arrow emitted and displayed in the lower movable effect unit.

Further, FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board showing the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit in a lowered state. FIG. 113 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 114 is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit in a lowered state. FIG. 116 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It includes 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 117).

The back unit 3000 is a box shape that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has an open front, and has a square opening on the rear wall where the effect display device 1600 faces forward, and a back box at the lower part inside the back box. The lower movable effect unit 3100 attached, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box, and the upper front movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box in front of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200. It is equipped with a movable production unit 3300.

[5-9a. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part in the back box, and a part of the lower movable effect unit 3100 is located in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached below the effect display device 1600 near the front end of the back box, and a lower center effect unit 3110 arranged behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. It includes a 3120, a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170, which are arranged on the left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120, respectively.

The lower front center decoration unit 3110 includes a lower front center decoration 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (inverted isosceles triangle shape with flat vertices) and translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The lower front center decorative body 3111 can be light-emitting decorated by the lower central decorative substrate of the lower central effect unit 3120.

The lower center effect unit 3120 is mounted on the front surface of the lower center elevating base 3121 and the lower center elevating base 3121 which are vertically mounted in the back box behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 to provide translucency. The lower center decorative substrate 3122 and the lower center decorative substrate (not shown) are arranged on the rear side of the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and are mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front. (Omitted) and a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121.

Although not shown, the lower center effect unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower center elevating base in the vertical direction, and a unit. A rod-shaped arm member whose base end extends rotatably around an axis extending back and forth on the base, a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member and inserted into the slit of the lower center elevating base 3121, and an arm member. It is equipped with a lower center elevating drive motor that rotates.

Although not shown, the lower center elevating base 3121 has slits extending to the left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into the slits. The lower center elevating base 3121 is located between a lowering position where the whole is behind the lower front central decorative body 3111 and an ascending position where the whole is above the lower front central decorative body 3111 by the lower central elevating drive motor. It is installed so that it can be raised and lowered.

The lower rear center decoration body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle, and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The lower rear center decorative body 3122 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from the LED of the lower central decorative substrate. The lower center decorative substrate is mounted so that a plurality of LEDs can independently emit and decorate each light emitting region 3122a of the lower rear center decoration body 3122, and the lower center elevating base 3121 is raised. Occasionally, it is mounted so that it can irradiate light toward the lower front centerpiece 3111, which is downward and forward.

Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction, and each of the central movable unit 3125 extends upward in a flat plate shape. A plurality of central rotation drive motors are mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with their rotation shafts oriented in the left-right direction, and the outer circumferences of the respective center rotation drive motors are mounted on the rotation shafts of each center rotation drive motor. It is provided with a plurality of cubic rotating decorative bodies 3126, which cover the above. The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a central rotation drive motor, and each of them is arranged coaxially in the left-right direction. Further, each rotating decorative body 3126 has different decorative portions 3127 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 can be independently rotated by their respective central rotation drive motors.

Further, although not shown, the central movable unit 3125 is attached below each rotating decorative body 3126 on the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and a plurality of central movable units 3125 capable of irradiating light toward each rotating decorative body 3126. It is provided with a lower center upper surface decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. Each rotating decorative body 3126 can be light-emittingly decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower center upper surface decorative substrate.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped lower piece portion and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. It has a flat upper side portion that extends from the upper end of the side portion and the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion to the right, which is shorter than the lower piece portion, and is the front surface of the unit base of the lower center effect unit 3120. On the left side of the view, the left unit base is installed in the back box, and the lower and upper ends are attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively, near the right side of the side side of the left unit base. A rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends vertically by the lower and upper pieces of the left unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on the outer circumference. And the lower left side elevating base 3151 which has a nut screwed into the male screw member and is slidably attached to the guide shaft, and the lower left which is attached to the left unit base and rotates the male screw member. The side elevating drive motor, the lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the front of the lower left side elevating base 3151 and having translucency, and the lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the right side of the lower left side decorative body 3152 to the left. It includes a lower left side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted.

The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3152a arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each light emitting region is appropriately emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate. Each of the 3152a can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower left slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotating shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side attached to the rotating shaft of the lower left slide drive motor. A cam member having a columnar sliding pin that is slidably inserted into a slit of a slider is provided on the tip side extending horizontally from the base end side of the cage.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a mounting base that is mounted on a slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is oriented in the left-right direction on the mounting base. It includes a left-side rotary drive motor that is attached, and a cubic left-side rotary decorative body 3153 that is mounted on the rotary shaft of the left-side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left-side rotary drive motor. The left-side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a left side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotation decoration body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the left side rotation decoration body 3153. It is provided with a lower left side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The left side rotating decoration body 3153 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left side upper surface decorative substrate.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the sub-mounting base which is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub-mounting base. A cubic left sub-side rotation that is mounted on the rotation shaft of the left sub-side rotation drive motor and the left sub-side rotation drive motor that is mounted with the rotation shaft oriented in the left-right direction, and covers the outer circumference of the left sub-side rotation drive motor. It includes a decorative body 3155 and. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 has different decorative portions 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a left sub-side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base below the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, and faces the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155. It is provided with a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 has a height at which the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 attached to the left unit base can enter the lower left side rotating decoration 3153 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, when the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is assembled on the game board 5, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is placed between the lower left side rotation decoration unit 3150 and the leftmost rotation decoration body 3126 of the lower center production unit 3120. There is an interval that allows you to enter.

In the lower left side effect unit 3150, by rotating the male screw member by the lower left side elevating drive motor, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 is connected with the slider via the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower center effect unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowering position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowering position and an ascending position at the same height as the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. Further, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, by rotating the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 via the slider. , It can be slid in the left-right direction between the retracted position, which is located below the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155, about half away from the lower center effect unit 3120.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped lower piece portion and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece portion. It has a flat upper side portion that extends from the upper end of the side portion and the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion to the left, which is shorter than the lower piece portion, and is the front surface of the unit base of the lower center effect unit 3120. A columnar guide shaft with the lower and upper ends attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively, near the left side of the side side of the right unit base and the right unit base installed in the back box on the right side of the view. A rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends vertically by the lower and upper pieces of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on the outer circumference. And the lower right side elevating base 3171 which has a nut screwed into the male screw member and is slidably attached to the guide shaft, and the lower right which is attached to the right unit base and rotates the male screw member. The side elevating drive motor, the lower right side decorative body 3172 that is attached to the front of the lower right side elevating base 3171 and has translucency, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 that is attached to the right side of the lower right side decorative body 3172 to the right. It includes a lower right side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted.

The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3172a arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each light emitting region is appropriately emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate. Each of the 3172a can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower right slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotation axis extends upward below the slider, and the base end side attached to the rotation axis of the lower right slide drive motor. A cam member having a columnar sliding pin that is slidably inserted into a slit of a slider is provided on the tip side extending horizontally from the base end side of the cage.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 has a mounting base that is mounted on a slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is oriented in the left-right direction on the mounting base. It includes a right-side rotary drive motor that is attached, and a cubic right-side rotary decorative body 3173 that is mounted on the rotary shaft of the right-side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right-side rotary drive motor. The right-side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the right side rotation decoration body 3173 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a right side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right side rotating decoration body 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the right side rotating decoration body 3173. It is provided with a lower right side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right side upper surface decorative substrate, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be light-emitting decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the sub-mounting base which is mounted on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub-mounting base. A cubic right sub-side rotation that is attached to the rotation shaft of the right sub-side rotation drive motor and the right sub-side rotation drive motor that are mounted with the rotation shaft facing left and right, and covers the outer circumference of the right sub-side rotation drive motor. It includes a decorative body 3175 and. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 has different decorative portions 3176 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a right sub-side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and faces the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. It is provided with a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

The lower right side effect unit 3170 is assembled on the game board 5 and has a height at which the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 attached to the right unit base can enter the lower right side rotating decoration 3173. The lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, when the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side rotation decoration body 3173 is placed between the lower right side rotation decoration unit 3170 and the rightmost rotation decoration body 3126 of the lower center production unit 3120. There is an interval that allows you to enter.

In the lower right side effect unit 3170, by rotating the male screw member by the lower right side elevating drive motor, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is connected with the slider via the lower right side elevating base 3171, and the lower center effect unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowering position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowering position and an ascending position at the same height as the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. Further, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, by rotating the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor, the right side rotation decoration 3173 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 via the slider. , It can be slid in the left-right direction between the retracted position, which is located below the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175, about half away from the lower center effect unit 3120.

As shown in FIG. 110, the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a decorative portion 3127 of each of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, a decorative portion 3154 of the left side rotating decorative body 3153, a decorative portion 3156 of the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, and a right. Different decorations are formed on the decorative portion 3174 of the side rotating decorative body 3173 and the decorative portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 are each formed into a dice-shaped cube and extend to the left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the axis of rotation.

When the front surfaces of the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 are each facing the front, from the left. They are "Rotation", "One eye", "One eye", "Second eye", "Third eye", "Four eyes", "One eye", and "Rotation". In addition, when the second side of each is facing the front, it is "star", "super", "chi", "ya", "n", "su", "!", And "star" from the left. In addition, when the third side is facing the front, it is "!", "凰", "ge", "ki", "a", "tsu", "凰", "!" From the left. Furthermore, when the fourth side is facing the front, it is "celebration" "!" "O" "me" "de" "to" "u" "!!" from the left.

In this way, the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are each directed to the front with the same numbered faces. Therefore, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value that becomes a "big hit" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear center decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light as appropriate. "Arrows" of different sizes can be displayed by light emission. Specifically, when only the lower front center ornament 3111 is made to emit light, a triangular "small arrow" in which the apex of the isosceles triangle points downward can be made to emit light (FIGS. 106 and 111 (a)). reference). Further, when the lower front center decoration 3111 and the raised lower rear center decoration 3122 are made to emit light, a downwardly pointing "middle arrow" having a rod extending upward larger than the "small arrow" is emitted and displayed. (See FIGS. 107 and 111 (b)). Further, in the state of the "middle arrow", the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 are raised, and the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right are raised. When all the side decorations 3172 are made to emit light, a "large arrow" in which the upper end of the arrow pointing downward, which is larger than the "middle arrow", extends to the left and right can be made to emit light (FIGS. 108 and 111 (c)). See).

In this way, since it is possible to emit and display three arrows of different sizes, "small arrow", "medium arrow", and "large arrow", "big arrow", "medium arrow", and "large arrow" are "big hits" in that order. It is possible to display that the expected value is high.

Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the lower movable effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, in the lower center effect unit 3120, the lower center elevating base 3121 is behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and is invisible from the front. The four rotary ornaments 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower center elevating base 3121 are located so as to be in contact with the upper end of the lower front center ornament 3111 in the front view.

Further, in a normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side evacuation base 3151 is located at a lower position slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front. The left side rotating decoration body 3153 is separated from the lower center effect unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and about half of the left side rotating decoration body 3153 is located in the retracted position below the left sub side rotating decoration body 3155. It is located near the left end in the region 5a, which is downward from the center in the vertical direction.

Further, in a normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side evacuation base 3171 is located at a lower position slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front. The right side rotating decoration 3173 is separated from the lower center production unit 3120 to the right via the slider, and about half is located in the retracted position below the right sub side rotating decoration 3175, and the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a game. It is located near the right end in the region 5a, which is downward from the center in the vertical direction.

As one of the effects presented to the player in this normal state, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 that has stopped rotating. To the player. As a result, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the movable effect of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be enjoyed. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies the predetermined conditions, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 by the lower central decorative substrate. Is emitted to emit light to decorate the lower front central decoration unit 3111 of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 located in front of the unit. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106, the lower front center decorative body 3111 emits a downward arrow, and the downward arrow emits light to display the player's line of sight below the game area 5a. It is possible to guide the player to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in the above, to urge the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and to easily participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Alternatively, from the normal state, the lower center elevating base 3121 is set according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Raise from the descending position to the ascending position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Not only can the person be surprised, but the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. After that, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 that has stopped rotating is given to the player. Make it visible. As a result, when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination, the player may think that it must be a "big hit" (a lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs). It is possible to make the player feel excited depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the lottery result. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies the predetermined conditions, a plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the rising lower central elevating base 3121. The LED is made to emit light, and the lower rear center decorative body 3122 arranged in the front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are made to emit light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107, the lower rear center decoration body 3122 and the lower front center decoration body 3111 emit a large downward arrow, and the light emission display of the large downward arrow causes the game. The line of sight of the person can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed by emitting a large arrow. By operating it, it is possible to make the player think that it is a "big hit", and the player can operate the production operation unit 301 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Furthermore, from the normal state, the lower center elevating base 3121 is determined according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Is raised from the descending position to the ascending position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Not only can the person be surprised, but the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. Subsequently, after sliding the left and right left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173 to the appearance positions on the center side, respectively, the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are respectively. Raise to the ascending position (see FIG. 108). As a result, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the lottery result seem to be a "big hit". After that, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are rotated and then stopped to rotate to the left. The decorative part 3156 of the sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the decorative part 3154 of the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the decorative part 3127 of each of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the decorative part 3174 of the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3173. The player is made to visually recognize the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decorative parts 3127 include the decorative part 3127 on which the number decoration is applied, the countdown is stopped by stopping the rotation of the number decoration part 3127 so as to face forward. It is possible to perform an effect as if it were done, and the countdown effect can make the player think that the lottery result must be a "big hit" and enhance the interest in the game. Then, when the rotation of the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155, the left side rotating decoration body 3153, the four rotating decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotating decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 is stopped and the countdown is completed, The lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are luminescently decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, a larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is emitted and displayed, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the huge arrow. It is possible to be convinced that the lottery result is a "big hit", and the player can surely operate the production operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is emitted and displayed, the effect display device 1600 is displayed with a message explaining the effect operation unit 301, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 109). As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates at a high speed, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Therefore, the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably pressed to entertain the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 109, the character "The rotation of the lower button is hot!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the rotation operation unit 302 is focused on the player to perform the rotation operation. The faster the rotation speed of the unit 302, the higher the expected value of "big hit" is to be notified to the player. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and the effect image for notifying the player of the expected value is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in FIG. 109, as an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a lower front center decorative body 3111, a lower rear center decorative body 3122, and a lower left side decoration as shown in FIG. 111. It is also possible to display an effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the operation of the player is prompted by the "arrow" emitted and displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, and the like. Specifically, an effect image such as "press the button!", "Turn the dial!", "Turn the dial to the left!", "Turn the dial to the right!", Etc. is displayed. As a result, the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be accurately performed, and the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 can be surely enjoyed.

Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the expected value that becomes a "big hit" may be displayed by the effect image. Expected values are obtained using four rotating ornaments 3126, left side rotating ornaments 3153, left subside rotating ornaments 3155, right side rotating ornaments 3173, and right subside rotating ornaments 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape. It may be displayed.

As an display of expected values using four rotating ornaments 3126, left side rotating ornaments 3153, left subside rotating ornaments 3155, right side rotating ornaments 3173, and right subside rotating ornaments 3175, which are formed in a dice shape, respectively. Performs an effect of displaying the expected value of a "big hit" by combining each of the decorative parts 3127, the decorative part 3154, the decorative part 3156, the decorative part 3174, and the decorative part 3176, which face the front by each rotation and stop. .. Specifically, when only the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 in the center are used, for example, there are the following three patterns. In the pattern a1, the expected value is displayed in a state in which the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating is a disjointed combination in which the player cannot read the meaning. No pattern. In the pattern a2, the expected value is high to some extent in the state where each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops rotating with the second surface facing the front and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is "chi", "ya", "n", and "su". The pattern displaying that. In the pattern a3, each rotating decorative body 3126 stops rotating with the third surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is in a state of "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu", and the expected value is extremely high. The pattern displaying that. In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by the rotation stop of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of the pattern a1, the pattern a2, and the pattern a3.

Further, as an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 ( Using the dice-shaped rotating body of eight), the effect of displaying the expected value of "big hit" by combining the decorative part 3127, the decorative part 3154, the decorative part 3156, the decorative part 3174, and the decorative part 3176 is produced. You may do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combinations of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 that have stopped rotating are different combinations (the expected value is not displayed). In pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "chi" "ya" " "S", the right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!" Or "凰", and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (chance display). In pattern b3, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "ge" "ki" " A "" "tsu", the right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!" Or "凰", and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (Gekiatsu display). In pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "chi" "ya" "n" "su". , The right side rotating decoration 3173 is "!", And the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (super chance display). In pattern b5, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "ge" "ki" "a" "tsu". , The right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!", And the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (super gekiatsu display). In pattern b6, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "celebration", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!", The four central rotating decorations 3126 are "o", "me", "de", "to", and the right side. The combination of the rotating decoration body 3173 is "U" and the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 is "!!" ("Big hit" confirmed). In this way, it is displayed by stopping the rotation of eight rotating bodies of four rotating decorative bodies 3126, left side rotating decorative body 3153, left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, right side rotating decorative body 3173, and right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

In the above effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the expected value as described above is not performed. , The light emission display of "arrow" is also turned off. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the above expected value using the remaining effect time is performed. Continue to perform, and when the production time ends, the above production ends, and at the same time, the light emitting display of the "arrow" turns off and the production ends.

As described above, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being performed in the game area 5a in the normal state (the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating decorations 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front center decoration 3111 may rotate or the lower center. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side by the elevating base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central decorative body 3122, and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 raised by the lower central elevating base 3121 rotate, and the lower left A pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173 slide in the left-right direction by the lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and the lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide mechanism). The left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3173 rotate, and the left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body are provided by the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175, on which 3173 is rising, are lined up in the left-right direction, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotate. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect like The decorative body 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 and the like can be noticed, and the movable effect by them can be enjoyed.

Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the descending end, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 is made to emit light and the lower front central decorative body 3111 is made to emit light, so that a downward arrow is emitted and the lower center elevating is displayed. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear center decoration 3122 and the lower front center decoration 3111 to emit light by a plurality of LEDs on the lower center decoration substrate, a large downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light, or a pair of lower left side elevating and lowering. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to make the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. The effect can also entertain the player, and the downward arrow displayed by the light emitting can guide the player's line of sight to the lower effect operation unit 301, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301. Can be encouraged. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or presses the pressing operation unit 303, thereby participating in the player participation type production. Can be entertained.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emitting effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to present various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected production. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear center decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, and the like cause the player to emit a downward arrow to display a downward arrow. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 is provided with an effect image prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image explaining the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of the effect and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301. The production operation unit 301 can be easily operated, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

[5-9b. Movable production unit after the upper part]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part in the back box above the effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box.

The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is attached to the left base 3211 mounted in the back box and the left base 3211 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper left to the lower right, although detailed illustration is omitted. The left slider 3212, the linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with the rotation axis facing the front-rear direction, and the upper rear left. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and connected to the rotation shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 on the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the drive gear 3215 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3216 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3217, the third transmission gear 3218 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3217 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, the third transmission gear 3218, and the rack gear 3213, respectively. It includes a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3219 that is meshed and rotatably attached to the left base 3211.

Further, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and is attached to the rear side of the flat upper rear left decorative body 3220 extending to the left and right and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 to the front surface. It is equipped with an upper rear left decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decorative substrate.

The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decorative body 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

The upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 installed in the back box and the right base 3231 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper right to the lower left, although detailed illustration is omitted. The right slider 3232, the linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, the upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with the rotation axis facing the front-rear direction, and the upper rear right drive. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the motor 3234 and connected to the rotation shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234 on the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the gear 3235 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3236 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237, the third transmission gear 3238 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3237 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233, respectively. It is equipped with a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3239 that is rotatably attached to the right base 3231.

Further, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and is attached to the rear side of the flat upper rear right decorative body 3240 extending to the left and right and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the front surface. It is equipped with an upper rear right decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decorative substrate.

The upper rear right unit 3230 can raise and lower the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234.

The clutch mechanism 3250 has a tubular accommodating case 3251 and a plurality of projecting portions 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 in the accommodating case 3251, and has an upper rear left drive motor 3214 or an upper portion. An input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a inserted in the accommodating case 3251 with a protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252 in the circumferential direction. A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so that the distance from the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 becomes narrower as it approaches the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 projecting from the accommodating case 3251. The output member 3253 having the output shaft 3253c to which the output member 3253 is attached, the plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251, and the accommodating case 3251. It has a tightening spring 3255 that is tightened from the outside, and a storage recess 3256a that houses the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255. It is provided with a lid member 3257 that closes the accommodating recess 3256a of the 3256 and through which the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 penetrates, and a bearing 3258 that is attached to the lid member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted. (See FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c)).

In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the plurality of protruding portions 3252a of the input member 3252 become the circumferential ends of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. The abutment causes the output member 3253 to rotate, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can directly transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side.

Further, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves in the direction of the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is bitten between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is rearward via the input member 3252. It is not transmitted to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 or the upper rear right decorative body 3240 acts downward due to gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 via the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. It is possible to keep the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 stopped at an arbitrary position.

In the clutch mechanism 3250 of the present embodiment, the accommodating case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodating case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodating recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (urging force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), The accommodation case 3251 rotates, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated with a strong force from the output side, slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the accommodation case 3251 and the accommodation case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 may be strongly bitten and the lock cannot be released, or the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and also inserts the two rollers 3254. May be configured so that the lock springs 3260 are used to urge each of the protrusions 3252a, which are close to each other. As a result, when a force for rotating the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251. It can be engaged with the inner surface, and the rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from the action of rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side to the lock is applied. It can be reduced as much as possible.

Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is located above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is invisible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are not driven, respectively, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 , The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and the upper part. The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission.

As a result, in order to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. It is not necessary to provide an electric lock mechanism for preventing the pachinko machine 1, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. Further, since the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving without permission, the game board 5 is being transported or attached to the island equipment of the game hall. Even if vibration or acceleration acts at the time of the above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the state of the origin at the time of shipment, and there is no need to perform unnecessary origin adjustment. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required to install the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In this normal state, depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move diagonally downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 The right end of the upper rear right ornament 3240 abuts to form one large ornament (see FIG. 112). As a result, a large decorative body extending to the left and right appears on the upper part of the front surface of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right). Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the decorative body 3240), vibrations from the effect operating unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232, and the upper part are provided. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the output is output. The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the member 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. The transmission of rotation from the left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is blocked, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending arbitrarily, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are unexpected via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the player from moving (falling), and to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from giving distrust to the player due to unintended movement. It is possible to entertain the player with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of production patterns that stop ascending and descending at the position, making it difficult for the player to get bored with the movable production of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is provided. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being damaged at an early stage due to overload, and the upper part can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, prevent the player from being uncomfortable, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protruding portions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are each connected by the lock spring 3260. When the protrusions 3252a, which are close to each other, are urged, the rollers 3254 are immediately applied when a force for rotating the output member 3253 is applied from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is released after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 up to this point can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, by moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other. Since the upper rear right decorative bodies 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, the appearance of the large decorative bodies by combining them can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player. At the same time, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous to the player due to the appearance of a large decorative body may occur, and expectations for the game can be expected. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress the decline in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and united, they try to move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side by contacting each other. However, since each of them has a clutch mechanism 3250, a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (rotating from the output side). Even if a force) is applied, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving due to contact with each other, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to the reaction of the contact. It is also possible to prevent the 3240 from returning, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and unite, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. ..

Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, since the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255 and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodating case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodating recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256, the output member is output from the output side. The 3253 is rotated and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 to engage the roller 3254 between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 acts via a plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. If it is larger than, slippage occurs between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the accommodating case 3251 rotates. Then, as the accommodating case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated with a strong force from the output side, slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the accommodation case 3251 and the accommodation case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 may be strongly bitten and the lock cannot be released, or the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the above-mentioned action and effect.

[5-9c. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part of the back box above the effect display device 1600 in front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part in the back box, the upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and the unit base 3301 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by being driven by an upper front drive motor 3302.

The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the circular central decorative body 3351 and the central decorative body 3351 which are attached so as to be able to move up and down (downward) in the center of the unit base 3301 in the horizontal direction. A pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are connected to each other and are rotatably attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The first protruding decorative body 3352 having the connecting rod 3352b, the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a are connected to each other. It has a second connecting rod 3353b that is coaxially attached to the first connecting rod 3352b of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and rotatably attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second protruding decorative body 3353 and the like are provided.

In the first protruding decorative body 3352, a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side. Further, the first protruding decorative body 3352 has a link attaching portion 3352c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the right side, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side.

In the second protruding decorative body 3353, a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a are formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Further, the second protruding decorative body 3353 has a link attaching portion 3353c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the left side, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side.

In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 are formed in the same shape and the same size. There is. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side behind the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side and a first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side behind the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Positionally, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction.

Although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a plurality of LEDs on the front side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a. Has an upper front center decorative substrate, a first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and a second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate on which the central decorative body 3351, a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and a pair of The second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 around an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction at a symmetrical position with the center in the left-right direction of the front surface in between, and outward in the left-right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape and a pair of first link rods 3303 are rotatably attached to the tips of each of them around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and the tip side protrudes first. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative body 3353 around an axis extending back and forth, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. It is provided with an upper stopper 3305 that protrudes forward from the front and regulates the upward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303, and a lower stopper 3306 that regulates the downward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303. ing.

Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is raised, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 116 (a)). In this normal state, since the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction, the player can be made to recognize that they are one decorative body. Further, in the normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stopper 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Then, the central decorative body 3351 moves downward together with the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353. At this time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward while remaining horizontally extended. By moving the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 downward, the second link rod 3304 on the right side and the second link rod 3304 on the left side, which are attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side, and the left side. The left second link rod 3304 attached to the link attachment portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the above moves downward, and a pair of second link rods 3304 are attached to their respective tips. The first link rod 3303 rotates so that the tip side moves downward, respectively.

Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 rotating as the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (center decorative body 3351) moved downward came into contact with the lower stoppers 3306, further rotation was prevented. It becomes a state (see FIG. 116 (b)). When the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward after the pair of first link rods 3303 abut on the lower stopper 3306, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side are moved. Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b. Centering on the center of the central decorative body 3351), the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the side opposite to the side to which the second link rod 3304 is attached rotate in the downward movement direction. (See FIG. 116 (c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so that the scissors open. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged, which can surprise the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, under the normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 are overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one decorative body. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are rotated and opened so that the tips are separated from each other. It is possible to surprise the player who has recognized it as one decorative body, and to enjoy the movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350.

Further, by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be moved to the central decorative body 3351 by simply moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward. It is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 because the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be rotated and opened in directions opposite to each other.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. It was accepted by the mouth sensor 2511, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2301 that detects the game ball B that passed through the gate portion 2003, and the first large winning opening 2005. The first count sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B, the specific area sensor 2512a for detecting the game ball B received by the first large winning opening 2005 and distributed to the specific area by the distribution member, the second large winning opening 2006 Detection signals from the second count sensor 2513 that detects the received game ball B, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively. ..

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid are 2516, a drive signal is output to the distribution solenoid 2111, and the status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special symbol display, and first special of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to a hold number indicator, a second special symbol indicator, a second special hold count indicator, a round indicator, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first count sensor 2512, the specific area sensor 2512a, and the second count sensor 2513 are of a non-contact type. While an electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2511 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters. , The detection of the game ball B by the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513. Further, since the specific area sensor 2512a is also an important sensor (directly linked to the profit of the player) related to the occurrence of the big hit game, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for ejecting the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 117, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door-side drive light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral control MPUs. Is entered in. Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board of the game board 5, are input with a plurality of serials different from the display commands. It is performed by the output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or is based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, each drive motor provided on the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scanning. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to the pixels of one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails. , The flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails and is centered. It will flow down the area on the left side of the accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is released from the center in the left-right direction to the front. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the portion is located directly above the first start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200 or the obstacle nail, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike). , Is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this portion includes a second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 and a general winning opening 2001, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port is closed. 2004 is in the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 15 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the result of the ordinary lottery (for example, 0). .08 to 20 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "small hits" and "time reduction (time reduction) hits" is performed. In addition, the game balls B are accepted into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the lottery is performed. If a big hit is won based on the special lottery result, the big hit type is judged based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball. Game benefits (big hit game and game state after the big hit game) corresponding to the determined type of big hit (determined big hit type) are given. Similarly, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second. If a small hit is won in the special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B in the starting port 2004, the symbol random number acquired at the time of entering the ball (hereinafter, the symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special) The small hit type is determined based on (also called a symbol random number), and the game privilege (small hit game or small hit game) corresponding to the determined type of small hit (determined small hit type) is entered into a specific area. A big hit game to be executed when the game is played, a game state after the big hit game) is given, and the special lottery result of the lottery is given a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, special variation). It is suggested to the player over time). In addition, the jackpot type that is drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is "14R time saving jackpot (14R time saving jackpot). There are "A, 14R time saving big hit B)", "5R time saving big hit A, 5R time saving big hit B)", etc., and the small hit type is "5R small hit (no V hit) (5R small hit A1). , 5R small hit B1) "," 5R small hit (V time saving big hit) (5R small hit A2, 5R small hit B2) "," 14R small hit (V time short big hit) (14R small hit A, 14R small hit B) , Etc., as will be described in detail later, with respect to "5R small hits A2 and B2" and "14R small hits A and B", there are small hits that facilitate the entry of the game ball into a specific area. For "5R small hits A1, B1", it is more difficult for the game ball to enter a specific area than "5R small hits A2, B2" and "14R small hits A, B". The hit is set.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the result of the special lottery that causes an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 allows the game ball B to be accepted, it is often possible to make the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 accept the game ball B. The game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, for 1.8 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes from is executed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "big hit" or if the game ball that won the first big prize opening 2005 in the small hit game enters a specific area, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big prize After a predetermined long time (28.5 seconds in this example) has passed after the mouth 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or to the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 5 rounds for "5R jackpot" and 14 rounds for "14R jackpot" are repeated, and the award can be obtained by the player, which is advantageous to the player (big hit game). To generate.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are used until the result of the special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, it is possible to prevent the burden on the game hall side from increasing due to the accumulation of holds. When the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is suggested, the suggested special lottery result must be "big hit" and "small hit". For example, the start condition for the next special lottery result lottery is satisfied, and if there is a special lottery result held in the main control board 1310 in an unexecuted state, the special lottery result with the highest digestion order is obtained. Will be digested (executed) from.

The suggestion of the special lottery result (variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol)) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs. For example, if the special lottery result is "big hit", the LEDs are turned on in a combination according to the big hit type (big hit symbol), and if the special lottery result is "small hit", the LEDs are turned on in a combination according to the small hit type. If the special lottery result is "missing", the special lottery result is suggested by turning on the LED in a combination different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (missing symbol).

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and suggests the special lottery result as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner after changing each pattern sequence in a state where three pattern rows (decorative patterns) composed of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The displayed pattern rows (decorative patterns) are sequentially stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, each symbol sequence is changed in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. After that, the variable display of the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed in sequence. At this time, the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are stopped and displayed so that the combinations correspond to the special lottery results. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the result of the special lottery.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of left column → right column → middle column when viewed from the player side, and specific two rows (two on the left and right in this embodiment) are stopped. When the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the column), a reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, the left column is the first stop column, the right column is the second stop column, the middle column is the third stop column, and the left column and the right column are the reach formation columns forming the reach state among the plurality of symbol columns. It becomes.

Here, the "temporary stop display" can appear in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the period in which the special symbol maintains the fluctuating state. This is a state in which a specific decorative symbol is displayed in a fluctuating state within the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, the "fixed stop display" can appear when or after the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. This is a state in which all the decorative symbols are stopped without shaking in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. The time until it is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time. Further, when the time (variable time) suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 elapses, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 described later. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) does not completely stop the effect suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 until the stop display command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) (for example). Shake fluctuation display), stop (confirmed display) the effect that suggests the special lottery result based on the reception of the stop display command.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. A player participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, front effect unit 2600, lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and upper rear It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player by various productions, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

When the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped at the jackpot symbol as described above, the jackpot game in which the player can win the prize is performed on the main control board 1310. When executing the jackpot game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 are limited to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (14 rounds in this embodiment) according to the determined jackpot type. Is opened (the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are made ready to accept the game ball B), and a round game is performed. One round game is until the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment), and the first prize is won during one round game. Until the specified number of game balls B (upper limit number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) wins in the opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006, or the specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) ) Will be released until it elapses. In the round game, a round effect is performed. Then, when the round game of the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending period (about 5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is performed is generated, and when the ending period is completed, the jackpot game is terminated. NS.

Further, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped at the small hit symbol, the small hit game in which the player can obtain a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. When executing the small hit game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hit game is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the first prize opening 2005 is opened (the first prize opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted). In the embodiment, it is performed up to once). Until the specified number of game balls B (upper limit number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) wins in the first major winning opening 2005 during one open game, or the specified time (open game time: in this example) It will be released until 1.8 seconds) elapses. In the open game, an open effect is performed. Then, when the open game of the specified number of times is completed, an ending period (about 5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the ending effect indicating the end of the small hit game is performed is generated, and when the ending period is completed, the small hit game is started. It will be terminated.

Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the big hit game may be continuously generated after the small hit game is completed. Although not shown, the first prize opening 2005 is provided with a distribution member that distributes the game balls that have won the first prize 2005 into a specific area and a discharge area, and when the small hit game is started, the distribution solenoid is provided. According to 2111, it operates in a predetermined operation mode. Then, in the small hit game, when the game ball B wins the first large winning opening 2005, and the winning game ball B is distributed to a specific area inside by the distribution member and detected by the specific area sensor 2512a. , A round game is performed in which the second big winning opening 2006 is opened up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (15 rounds in this embodiment) according to the determined small hit type. Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the small hit game described above, not only the end of the small hit game is indicated, but also the game ball B distributed by the distribution member is a specific area inside the first large winning opening 2005. It is also indicated whether or not it is detected by the sensor 2512a, that is, whether or not the big hit game is continuously performed from the small hit game. If the big hit game is continuously generated after the small hit game is completed, the small hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened becomes one round, and the number of round games including this one round. Until the specified number of rounds is reached (from the second round to the fifteenth round), a round game in which the second major winning opening 2006 is opened is performed.

Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a part of the case where the jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol, and the time is reduced after the jackpot game is completed. Further, in a part of the case where the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a small hit symbol, the game ball B distributed by the distribution member during the small hit game is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a. After the end of the big hit game executed based on the fact, the time is controlled to be shortened. In this time-saving state, the result of the normal determination as to whether or not to make it easier for the game ball B to win the second starting port 2004 is derived as compared with the non-time-saving state (normal game state, etc.) in which the time-saving state does not occur. In addition to shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation, the second start port 2004 opens and closes in an opening pattern different from the non-time saving state when a normal symbol is won in the normal judgment (time saving control). ..

In the present embodiment, when winning in a non-time saving state, the opening pattern A in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is performed, while the time saving. When the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in a long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example), the opening pattern B is performed when the winning pattern is won in the state. That is, the second start port 2004 is set so that the opening / closing time corresponding to one normal drawing is longer in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state, and the player operates advantageously. Therefore, in the time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is in a state of improving the ball entry rate, which is easier to open and close than in the non-time saving state, and when the right-handed hit is continuously performed, the game is played in the second starting port 2004. The ball B is accepted, and the normal symbol variation according to the normal judgment is likely to occur. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the time is shortened is made based on the time when the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, and specifically, when the normal symbol change is stopped, it is not determined. In the case of the time saving state, the opening pattern A for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 in the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is executed even if the time is shortened at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation, and the normal symbol is executed. If the time is shortened when the fluctuation is stopped, the opening pattern B that opens and closes the second start port 2004 in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) even if the time is not shortened at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation is Will be executed.

According to the above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting port 2004 if the right-handed hit is continued when the player wins the game in a short time. There is a high probability that the game ball B will be received in the second starting port 2004). On the other hand, if the player wins the game in a non-time saving state, it is difficult for the game ball B to be accepted at the second starting port 2004. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, the variation display of the first special symbol mainly based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 is executed, and in the time saving state, the game ball B mainly to the second starting port 2004 is executed. The variable display of the second special symbol based on acceptance is executed.

Further, in the time saving state according to this embodiment, the total of the symbol variation of the first special symbol and the symbol variation of the second special symbol is predetermined after the end of the jackpot game executed when the 14R time saving jackpot is won. Number of times (100 times in this example: time saving number of times) After the time saving state A that ends when it is executed and the big hit game that is executed when the 5R time saving big hit is completed, the symbol variation of the first special symbol is a predetermined number of times. (In this example, 5 times: time saving number of times), or when the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (1 time: time saving number of times in this example), there is a time saving state B that ends. In addition, after the end of the big hit game executed when the 5R small hit (V time saving big hit) is completed, the time saving state B is controlled, and the big hit game executed when the 14R small hit (V time saving big hit) is won. After the end, it is controlled to the time saving state A.

In this way, in the non-time saving state, the variation display of the first special symbol mainly based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 is executed, and in the time saving state, the game ball B mainly to the second starting port 2004 is executed. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the acceptance of is executed. Further, in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won among the time saving states, the number of symbol fluctuations (time saving number) that can be executed during the time saving state B is set to 5 times in the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, it is set to once, and the number of times (time reduction number) is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second special symbol based on the start winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is more than the case where the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. When the variable display is executed, the player is in an advantageous state. In addition, in the time saving state B which is executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won in the time saving state, the fluctuation time is 7 seconds when the variation display of the first special symbol in which the result of the first special lottery is lost is executed. (Except for hold shortening control (control that sets the fluctuation time shorter than normal (7 seconds) when the number of holds is 3 or more)), but the second special lottery result is lost. (Ii) When the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time is 16 seconds (the second special symbol does not perform the hold shortening control in the time reduction state B which is executed when the 5R time reduction jackpot is won in the time reduction state). Is set to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when both the first hold number based on the start prize to the first start port 2002 and the second hold number based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 exist, The variable display of the second special symbol according to the second hold number is preferentially executed (the second hold number is preferentially consumed over the first hold number). As mentioned above, if the player continues to hit right when he wins the game in the time-saving state, it is highly probable that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting port 2004. In most cases, the time saving state B, which is executed when the jackpot is won, is due to the start winning of the second starting port 2004 and the variable display of the second special symbol based on this starting winning. finish.

Next, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. Eight kinds of numbers [1] to [8] are adopted as the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, and the jackpot symbol is [ 111] [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888] are adopted. In addition, 2/270 is specified as the winning probability of the jackpot on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side. The winning probability of the small hit on the first special symbol side is defined as 3/270, and the winning probability of the small hit on the second special symbol side is 113/270, respectively. As the winning probability per ordinary figure, 251/251 is specified. As for the number of prize balls for the game ball B, three for the first starting port 2002 and one for the second starting port 2004 are used for the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006. On the other hand, 15 pieces are specified respectively. Further, as the opening pattern A of the second starting port 2004, a mode in which the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state until 0.05 seconds have elapsed is defined. On the other hand, as the opening pattern B of the second starting port 2004, a mode in which the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state until 1.5 seconds have elapsed is defined. In addition, "1 ball" is defined as the maximum number of winning prizes, which is a condition for closing the second starting port 2004. Further, in each round game of the big hit game, "1 time" is set as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and "10 balls" is set as the maximum number of winnings. Further, in the small hit game, "1 time" is defined as the number of times the first major winning opening 2005 is opened, and "10 balls" is defined as the maximum number of winnings.

By the way, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened as a big hit game. Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control A predetermined number of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 by the substrate 633. Therefore, when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in the open state, by letting the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 accept the game ball B, many game balls B can be played. It can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

On the other hand, if the stopped special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are small hit symbols, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened as a small hit game. Then, when the game balls B are received in the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number of game balls B are released from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , Pay out to the upper plate 201. However, in the small hit game, the opening time of the first big winning opening 2005 is short, and in the big hit game, the first big winning prize is larger than the number of game balls B accepted in the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. The number accepted in the mouth 2005 is significantly smaller. In this way, in the small hit game, the number of game balls B paid out to the player is small, but during the small hit game, the game balls B that enter the first large winning opening 2005 and are distributed by the distribution member are The jackpot game can be generated by being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, and the player can be entertained.

Further, in this embodiment, 2/270 is set as the winning probability of the jackpot on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, and when the jackpot is won on the first special symbol side, Since most of them (94%) are configured to be 5R time saving big hits, the big hits (so-called first hits) on the first special symbol side in the normal game progress process (non-time saving state) are 5R time saving big hits. There is a high possibility that a big hit will occur, and after the end of the big hit game related to the 5R time saving big hit, the above-mentioned time saving state B will occur. Then, when the time saving state B is controlled after the jackpot game is completed and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variablely displayed, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed at the second starting port 2004 during the variable display. The number of second holds that is likely to lead to the execution of the small hit game is increased by inserting the number of game balls B, and after the change display, the change display according to the number of the second hold is executed to execute the small hit game. Will make the game company have high expectations. In other words, when the time saving state B is controlled after the end of the big hit game, whichever of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is variablely displayed, the variable display time is used to first make a small amount. A stock game that increases (stores) the second hold number that is likely to lead to the execution right of the winning game is executed, and the second hold number that is increased (stored) during the stock game after the fluctuation display is exhausted to perform a small hit game. It is possible to realize a new game property of executing a digestion game aiming to acquire the execution right of Is possible.

Further, in order to more preferably realize the above-mentioned game characteristics, in the present embodiment, the progress control in the time saving state is controlled in a peculiar form. Specifically, in the time saving state B which is executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won in the time saving state, the start winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is generated and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Is to end the time saving state B after executing the variation display of the second special symbol only once, but since the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation time of 16 seconds, during that time. A plurality of start prizes are generated in the second start port 2004, and after the end of the time saving state B, the variation display based on the plurality of start prizes is executed. That is, in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won in the time saving state, the variation display period of the second special symbol executed based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is , The opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 is set long enough to be executed multiple times, and as a result, a period for generating a plurality of starting prizes for the second starting port 2004 (increasing the number of second hold). It has become. As a result, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B, the above-mentioned "number of reserved second special symbols is accumulated and digested" using before and after the end of the time saving state B. It is possible to realize "playing game characteristics" and prevent a decline in game interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second hold number is zero in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won in the time saving state (the second holding number is not stored). In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the first hold number or the occurrence of a new start prize in the first start port 2002, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed once. It is decided that the time saving state B is continued even after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol once without ending the time saving state B, and the first in the time saving state B in which the variation display of the second special symbol is not performed. It is configured to end the time saving state B after executing the variable display of the special symbol up to 5 times. As a result, the first, which is more disadvantageous than the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed because there is no second hold number in the time-saving state B, which is executed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is won in the time-saving state. The variable display of the special symbol is executed only once, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the time saving state B is ended (for example, the second special symbol is the first special symbol). Even though it is easier to win a small hit than, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the player cannot receive the right for one lottery of this second special symbol), and such a disadvantage occurs. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to this.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the time saving state B is terminated after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed up to 5 times in the time saving state B in which the variation display of the second special symbol is not performed. Therefore, after the start of the time saving state B, the time saving state B continues even if all the four reserved numbers of the first special symbols that have already been stored are exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to experience the above-mentioned game characteristics even if the player leaves the seat after the start of the time saving state B, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by leaving the seat.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed once, even if the variation display of the first special symbol does not reach five times, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed once. It is configured so that the time saving state B ends with the display. That is, one symbol variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state B also functions as a limiting means for forcibly terminating the time saving state B that may occur over a plurality of fluctuation displays on the first special symbol side. Since the time saving state B is not easily lengthened and it can be suppressed that it is excessively advantageous to the player, it is possible to more preferably realize the above-mentioned game characteristics.

In the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won among the time saving states, the condition (number of times of time saving) for ending the time saving state B is not limited to the above, and at least the second special symbol is used. It may be configured so that the variable display of It may be 5 times, and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol may be 2 times. As described above, when the variable display of the other special symbol is made to function as a limiting means for forcibly terminating the time saving state that may occur over a plurality of variable displays on one special symbol side, the other person's variable display is performed. It is preferable to set the number of fluctuations of the special symbol to one.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the symbol variation of the first special symbol is executed five times or the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed once after the end of the jackpot game as the time saving state B. It is configured to end, but in addition, programming is done so that the time saving state B is ended by executing the total number of fluctuations of the symbol fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol five times after the end of the jackpot game. You may set it. For example, when adding the total number of fluctuations, when determining the end of the time saving state B, the total number of fluctuations is referred to after the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. It can be exemplified that it is configured as follows. With this configuration, programming changes from other gaming machines that do not differ in the end trigger of the time saving state for the first and second special symbols, or the end trigger of the time saving state for the first and second special symbols When changing programming to other gaming machines that do not differ, it is possible to standardize the program data related to the total number of fluctuations without the need for major changes such as deletion or addition, but the second special symbol symbol. It is possible to realize the above-mentioned game characteristics in which the time saving state ends when the fluctuation is executed once.

[8. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first subjected to various processes in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Initializes the data stored in the RAM built in the register or main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as the main control built-in RAM). The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is saved in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). The restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random numbers, which are the numbers to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, are updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the special symbol. Whether or not to reach as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of The reach random number used in the lottery process (whether or not to execute the effect), and the symbol random number used in the lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the above special random number. A random number counter that holds random numbers such as (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), random number (ordinary random number) used for the lottery process related to the winning of the second starting port 2004), etc. I have.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2002 is started and the second starting port 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to acquire the reach random number from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is increased by acquiring from the counters that update the reach random number from different random numbers. It may be different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and corresponds to the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach judgment table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be different by providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS.

FIG. 118 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2301, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, the second count sensor 2513, the general winning port sensor 3001, Detection signals from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 and the specific area sensor 2512a are input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated and the counter of the random number counter. The operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is described. The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the opening of the second starting port 2004 as the process of step S15. In this normal symbol process process as well, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer as the process of step S18.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, and the second count sensor 2513 as the process of step S19. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the like are in the ON state, the prize ball processing for outputting the payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. do. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 and pays out the prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 3002 is turned on, "3 balls", and the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 and the first start port sensor 3002 is turned on. (2) When the start port sensor 2511 is turned on, "1 ball", when the game ball B wins the first prize opening 2005 and the first count sensor 2512 is turned on, "15 balls", the second prize. When the game ball B wins the mouth 2006 and the second count sensor 2513 is turned on, "15 balls", when the game ball B wins the general winning mouth 2001 and the general winning mouth sensor 3001 is turned on. The prize balls of "8 balls" are paid out to the players respectively.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of reserved storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002, as shown in FIG. 119. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is built in the main control. The first start port passage process such as storing in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2511 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the control of the jackpot game is performed. The jackpot control process (step S40) for performing the above is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process (result of hit determination and contents of jackpot type) regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped suggests "15R jackpot". When the first prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B are won in the first prize opening 2005 by the first count sensor 2512. A process of controlling the 15R jackpot game in which the opening / closing pattern of closing when detected is repeated 15 times is executed.

Further, in the big hit control process, after performing such open control of the first big winning opening 2005, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the big hit game based on the big hit controlled in the time saving is finished after the big hit game is finished. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in 130 or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time reductions is set so that the time reduction control is terminated when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once. That is, when the time saving control is started after the jackpot game is completed and either the condition of executing the variation display of the first special symbol five times or the variation display of the second special symbol once is satisfied. The time saving control is terminated.

Further, if the big hit executing flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit is executed. If the executing flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006, which will be described later, After opening the second big winning opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B, or when it is detected by the second count sensor 2513 that 10 game balls B have won in the second big winning opening 2006. Perform the closing process. In addition, when the game ball B that has won a prize in the second prize opening 2006 and is distributed by the distribution member enters a specific area, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time by controlling the big hit game (for example). After 28.5 seconds) or when 10 game balls B have been won in the first prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern is repeated 15 times when the first count sensor 2512 detects that the game has been changed to the 15R jackpot game. Control. On the other hand, when the game ball B, which has won a prize in the first large winning opening 2005 and is distributed by the distribution member, does not enter the specific area and enters the discharge area, it is not controlled by the big hit game and is small. After the hit game is completed, the game state (normal state or time saving state) before the small hit game is controlled again.

Further, the main control MPU is a second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the first (Ii) On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode is executed (step S39).

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 120. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S45), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of stored items, a command (commands 0 to 4 for specifying the number of first reserved items) for instructing the number of first reserved items is set in the above-mentioned storage process (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is designed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the first reserved memory number). (I) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to the above are set (step S62).

Then, in the above-mentioned special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, it is executed by the big hit type, and if it is not a big hit, it is executed by the effect display device 1600. Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the advance determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is executed as the game effect to be performed, and the variation display according to the start winning is started. Will be able to grasp.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, it is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. The judgment information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, assuming that the second start port sensor 2511 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004 in the process of step S33, it is shown in FIG. 122. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is "4" or not (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is secondly held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of stored items, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the number of second stored items is set in the above-mentioned storage process (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It is designed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since the above and the table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is performed according to the first special symbol process flag, provided that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85). It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process or the like for an aspect is performed.
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118).

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 124, first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is stored in the same main control built-in RAM. Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize for the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and memorized, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table shown in FIG. 126 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number, (Ii) When the special symbol normal processing is being executed, the comparison is made with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 126 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of hit determination values that match the jackpot determination value indicating that the two types of first special random numbers have won the jackpot and are different from the jackpot determination value. Each of the above first special random numbers matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit, and matches the loss judgment value indicating that the 265 types of first special random numbers are lost. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 3/270). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, two types of second special random numbers are used. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 113 kinds of second special random numbers different from the big hit judgment value match the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won, and 155 kinds of the second special The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that the random numbers are lost (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 113/270). That is, the judgment table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being judged as a small hit than the hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002 is executed. It is becoming more advantageous for the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing. As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is completed.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table in the time reduction state, and the non-time reduction table used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 127. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 126 (B) and uses the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the selected jackpot symbol determination table, the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 126 (B), the jackpot symbol determination table is associated with symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) according to the determination result (14R time reduction jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot). It is remembered. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. 1. Closed after the first prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to be a 14R jackpot game in which the ball B can enter the first prize opening 2005 (easy), and after the jackpot game is completed, the symbol of the special symbol changes. If the next big hit game does not occur before it is executed 100 times, the state will be terminated. The time saving state A will be controlled. 14R Time saving big hit A
2. Closed after the first prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005. After that (1 round), after opening the 2nd prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after 10 game balls B win in the 2nd prize opening 2006, the above 2nd count sensor By repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected in 2513 four times (4 rounds), the game ball B can enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) for a 5R big hit game. Controlled, after the end of the jackpot game, the next jackpot game must occur before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. If the state is terminated, the time saving state B is controlled to 5R time saving jackpot A.
3. 3. Closed after opening the second prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 2513 that 10 game balls B have won in the second prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to be a 14R big hit game that can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy), and after the big hit game is finished, the symbol of the special symbol changes. If the next big hit game does not occur before it is executed 100 times, the state is terminated. The time saving state A is controlled. 14R Time saving big hit B
4. Closed after the first prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005. After that (1 round), after opening the 2nd prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after 10 game balls B win in the 2nd prize opening 2006, the above 2nd count sensor By repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected in 2513 four times (4 rounds), the game ball B can enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) for a 5R big hit game. Controlled, after the end of the jackpot game, the next jackpot game must occur before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. 5R time saving jackpot B to control to time saving state B when the state ends

In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 6 judgment values are distributed when the 14R time saving jackpot A is obtained, and 94 judgment values are distributed when the 5R time saving jackpot A is obtained. There is. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 6% probability that the 14R time saving big hit A will be obtained, and a 94% probability that the 5R time saving big hit A will be obtained. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the 14R time reduction jackpot B is obtained, and 42 judgment values are distributed when the 5R time reduction jackpot B is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 58% probability that the 14R time saving big hit B will be obtained, and a 42% probability that the 5R time saving big hit B will be obtained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as a 14R time-saving jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, the game state after the big hit game is completed is determined according to the type of the big hit. Then, in the jackpot control process (step S40), after controlling the jackpot game, a process of setting a time reduction flag based on the determination result and a process of setting the time reduction number according to the type of jackpot in the time reduction counter. Will be executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpots of "14R time saving jackpot A" and "14R time saving jackpot B" have been obtained, the special symbol (first special symbol) is executed after the jackpot game for 14 rounds is executed. When it is judged that the time saving state is controlled until the symbol fluctuation of (the sum of the second special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times, and the big hits of "5R time saving big hit A" and "5R time saving big hit B" are obtained. After the big hit game for 5 rounds is executed, the time is controlled until the variation display of the first special symbol is executed 5 times or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once. In this way, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, it is always controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and similarly, a lottery result that is a big hit by a lottery based on the second special random number. Even if is obtained, it is always controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game. However, when the big hits of "14R time saving big hit A" and "14R time saving big hit B" are obtained, the big hit game is more than the case where the big hits of "5R time saving big hit A" and "5R time saving big hit B" are obtained. It is designed to be controlled in a time-saving state for a long period of time after execution.

If the 14R time-saving jackpot A is determined, the 14R jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the 14R time-saving jackpot A symbol, and if the 5R time-saving jackpot A is determined, the 5R jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is 5R. Time saving jackpot A symbol is decided. In addition, when the 14R time-saving jackpot B is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 14R time-saving jackpot B symbol is determined as the 14R jackpot symbol of the second special symbol, and when it is determined to be the 5R time-saving jackpot B, the second special symbol is the first. (Ii) The 5R jackpot symbol of the special symbol is determined to be the 5R time-saving jackpot B symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a lost symbol when the jackpot flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines any of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, loss) as the process of step S137. A judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control MPU displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbols on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are variably displayed. Specifically, in the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, when the jackpot is specified from the received determination result notification command, the jackpot symbol (left, middle, right decorative symbol) is displayed. When the same symbol combination of [0] to [8] is determined and the reach loss is specified, the loss symbol with reach (the same symbol with the left and right decorative symbols [0] to [8] is the same. If you decide on a combination of symbols with different middle decoration symbols; reach loss symbol, and identify a loss, at least left and right of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols without reach. It is determined to be a combination in which the decorative symbols of are different symbols), and the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 128. If this is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the type of jackpot determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S146), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal loss (reach effect). In the case of loss), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for the fluctuation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The production control will be performed at.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, 164 types of variable random numbers out of 241 types of variable random numbers are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach with low jackpot expectation. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that any of the effects is executed, and a judgment value (223 to 240) indicating that 18 kinds of variable random numbers execute any of the super reach effects with high expectation of big hits. ) Is set. In addition, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game, the player's expectation for the big hit game increases when the super reach effect is executed. It has become.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, 4 to 60 seconds is set in the time saving state, and similarly, the second special random number is set. As the corresponding fluctuation time, 13 to 60 seconds is set in the non-time saving state, and 2 to 60 seconds is set in the time saving state.

When the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, then, as the process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S153). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is terminated is set (step S154).

If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S155, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is terminated.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 129, first steps S171. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 130, first steps S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is subjected to the display control. (I) A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). As a result, the time saving control is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 1 time, or 5 times). The control of the non-time saving state is started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S91) and the big winning opening opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S92), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the process proceeds to the large winning opening post-processing (step S93) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R time-saving jackpot A start command, 5R time-saving jackpot A start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (14R time-saving jackpot A, 5R time-saving jackpot A). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Further, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the jackpot start command (14R time-saving jackpot B start command, 5R time-saving jackpot B start) according to the type of jackpot (14R time-saving jackpot B, 5R time-saving jackpot B) Command) is set.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is, specifically, when the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot is hit in the jackpot control process (step S40) after the jackpot opening post-processing (step S93). After opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time, 10 game balls B win a prize in the first prize opening 2005. When this is detected by the first count sensor 2512, the opening / closing pattern is repeated 14 or 5 times (opening / closing control) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot executing flag, the jackpot control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Variable display of the first special symbol and function display The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the unit 1400 becomes feasible.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S186) and the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S191), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S191, the small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A) according to the type of small hit (5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A)). A Start command) is set. As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Further, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (5R small hit B1) according to the type of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B)). Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command) are set.

Further, when the small hit game is finished, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is specifically the small hit middle process (step S401) of the small hit control process (step S41) described later. ) To open / close control of the first big winning opening 2005 according to the type of small hit (for example, after opening the first big winning opening 2005 (for example, 1.8 seconds) or after the first big winning opening 2005 has 10 game balls B It is reset when the opening / closing control (opening / closing control) that closes when the winning is detected by the first count sensor 2512 is completed. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. Variable display of the first special symbol on the device and function display The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the unit 1400 becomes feasible.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer. (Step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

When the processes of steps S186 to S194 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (Step S195), this process ends.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will shift to the jackpot game based on the fact that the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S91), which waits until the next round is started.
2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is a jackpot symbol, the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are controlled to be open, and the next round is started. After controlling the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 in the open state and opening the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first Processing during opening of the large winning opening to close when the first count sensor 2512 or the second counting sensor 2513 detects that 10 game balls B have won in the large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 (step). S92)
3. 3. Post-processing after opening the big winning opening, which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game ends when all the rounds are finished (step S93).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-opening process (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118). Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S92), at the start of a round for controlling the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of a round that controls the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in a closed state, a big hit round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. 1. Small hit start process (step S400) to execute the setting process for starting the small hit game
2. Small hit medium processing (step S401) for monitoring the entry and opening time of the game ball B during the small hit game.

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118). In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into a specific area is detected in the small hit middle processing, the big hit executing flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game according to the type of small hit (5R small). 4 rounds if it is a hit, 13 rounds if it is a 14R small hit) is set in the big hit count counter, and the process is completed. As a result, the big hit game is started following the small hit game.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process process (step S15).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2301 is in the ON state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 133, the above As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. Run.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806) to stop the variable display of the symbol
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the process of controlling the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is performed. Ordinary electric accessory opening process to be executed (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118).

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S801, the detection signal by the gate sensor 2301 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 134, As the process of step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires a counter value by a normal hold number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU. .. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are set in order to newly put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into the hold state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S813, the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the ordinary symbol is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variation random number are not acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter), the variation display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

The gate portion passing process (step S802) may be performed by another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2301 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines the above. The ordinary random number and the above-mentioned normal random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter and stored in the provisional storage area. After that, the counter value by the normal hold number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the maximum value "4". conduct. Then, when it is determined that the hold storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition) in order to newly put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into the hold state. ), Then, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary-figure variable random number (the above-mentioned ordinary random number stored in the provisional storage area and the above-mentioned ordinary-figure variable random number) are selected from the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. It is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the hold storage number). In the case of the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary symbol variation random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage area, and the variation display control of the acquired ordinary symbol is newly performed. You may decide not to put it on hold.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol is normally stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are extracted from the first (first) area. Memorize in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area. Is stored, and when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 136 (A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 136 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the normal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, the above ordinary random numbers are set so as to match the normal figure hit judgment values indicating that all 10 types of ordinary random numbers have been won per normal figure. It is associated. That is, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the player always wins the game.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829), A flag per normal symbol is set to indicate that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), and the symbol per normal symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the normal symbol is determined to be a normal symbol lost symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, a lottery is performed so that these lottery results (instructing either a normal figure hit or a loss) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the general map judgment result notification command according to each result. After that, as the process of step S835, this process ends when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804).

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, the time saving flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 137. If (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the time reduction time is selected (step S842), and if the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the non-time reduction time is selected. (Step S843).

Then, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) to be executed is determined by comparing the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table with the normal symbol fluctuation random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S844). ), Set the normal symbol variation pattern command to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal symbol variation in the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and display the variation of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Is started (step S845).

Further, when the main control MPU determines the normal map fluctuation pattern, the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is set in the normal map fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed on the normal symbol display (variation display of the normal symbol in) of the function display unit 1400 only for the normal map fluctuation time according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time saving time of this example, 20 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during the time reduction of this example, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.8 seconds so that the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than that of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during the non-time reduction. Is set. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, when the variation display control of the normal symbol is started, the process is transferred to the normal symbol variation process (step S805) as the process of step S847, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated. End the process.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation processing (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S851. The normal map fluctuation timer for which the normal map fluctuation time is set in step S846 is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, this process ends when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol stop process (step S806).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 139, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S861. The display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol normal processing on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. The normal figure stop display command to be performed is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

Next, when the above-mentioned normal figure hit flag is set (step S863), the second start port according to the current gaming state is used by using the normal figure hit open pattern table shown in FIG. 136 (B). The opening pattern of 2004 is set (step S864).

Specifically, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result that is a normal figure is obtained by a lottery based on ordinary random numbers. The opening pattern A is executed in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the opening operation time of the second starting port 2004 is short, and the game ball is in the open state when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is difficult to get the ball in. That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed, the game ball hardly enters.

On the other hand, if the time is controlled to be shortened at the start of opening the second starting port 2004, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result that is a normal figure is obtained by a lottery based on ordinary random numbers. The opening pattern B is executed in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the opening operation of the second starting port 2004 is long, and the game ball is in the open state when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is possible to enter the ball.

When the opening pattern of the second start port 2004 is set, next, as the process of step S885, a normal figure hit start command indicating that the game per normal figure is started is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory. This process ends when the process is updated so that the process shifts to the release process (step S866). The normal figure hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the normal figure hit game according to the type of the normal figure hit instructed by the normal figure hit start command is produced by the effect display device 1600. It can be performed by lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has updated the normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the normal symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 140, as shown in FIG. 140, the main of the main control board 1310. If a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed after controlling the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S872), the control MPU is second. This process ends when the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the start port 2004 is turned off and the second start port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873).

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the second starting port 2004. (Step S874), when the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second start port 2004 is turned on and the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in the open state (step S875), this End the process.

Further, in the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second starting port 2004. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the second start port 2004 is opened in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), the end command per normal figure is set (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. It should be noted that the normal figure hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the normal figure hit end command, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. are used to produce the normal figure hit game. Can be terminated.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 141, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS progress flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS elapses and executes a 2 mS steady-state process. In the 2mS steady processing, the processing of counting up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 mS has elapsed, 16 mS has elapsed. Along with setting the flag T, the process of resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS progress flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS progress flag is set in step S502 (16 mS progress flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 mS progress flag (step S503), 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 mS steady-state process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS progress flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, when the 16 mS progress flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS progress flag T is “0”), the loop process is performed until the 16 mS progress flag T is set.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 mS steady-state process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Originally, the control process related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to various decorative substrates 184, 273 and the like is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16mS steady processing is completed within 16mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) when 16 mS elapses after the start of the 16 mS steady process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during the execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady state process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16mS steady processing in the sub-main processing.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. 1. Fluctuation pattern command (first variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second) for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the above command analysis process. After performing processing to control the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker, etc. based on the second variation pattern command) that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the process during the variation effect. Variable effect start process to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is measured, and the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. are controlled according to the elapsed time. The variable effect in-process (step S712) of changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable end process according to the elapse of the variable time according to the variable pattern of (1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol).
3. 3. Processing for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of the stop display command instructing to stop the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if there is a loss, the above effect Change the process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process, change it to a value according to the big hit effect process if it is a big hit, and change it to a value according to the small hit effect process if it is a small hit. (Step S713)
4. Based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing display control during the jackpot game, and changes the above effect process flag when the jackpot game ends. Big hit effect processing (step S714) to change the value according to the effect start process
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit game, the effect display device 1600 is processed to execute the display control during the small hit game, and the second big winning opening is performed during the small hit game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to a specific area, the above-mentioned effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big hit effect start process when the small hit game is ended, and the game ball B is distributed to the specific area. If not, the small hit effect process (step S715) is changed to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process.

Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display (first special symbol display of function display unit 1400, second special symbol display of function display unit 1400) by the above processing. The effect display device 1600 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of.

[10. Fluctuation control at the end of time reduction control]
As described above, the opening / closing control of the second starting port 2004 is performed in the time saving state with an opening pattern different from that in the non-time saving state. That is, if the time is shortened when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, the second start port 2004 is set to the opening pattern A in the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). If the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped and the non-time saving state is reached, the second opening pattern B in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is used. The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

In this way, in order to change the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 based on the time when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, immediately before the end of the time saving state (for example, the number of time saving times). In the case of the time saving state A of 100 times, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is placed on the special symbol in the time saving state (immediately before the 100th variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped, etc.). When the normal symbol fluctuation executed in is stopped and the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in the opening pattern B of the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as a time saving state. Will be done. Further, when the time saving state ends after the second starting port 2004 is opened, the player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time saving state is executed even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, a start prize may be given to the second start port 2004 at an unexpected time such as after the symbol change is started in the non-time reduction state after the end of the time reduction state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (In the non-time saving state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is hardly executed. However, despite the non-time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is reached. The start prize is generated and the change display of the second special symbol is executed), and at the same time, the behavior of the game may give the player a sense of discomfort, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is stopped at a lost symbol (for example, the first). (1) Special symbol stop processing step S194), normally, "0.5 seconds" is set in the interval timer as the waiting time (time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variation display is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process process (step S28) and the second special symbol process process (step S39), and the special symbol display (first) of the function display unit 1400 is used until the interval timer times out. (I) Control so that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol display (second special symbol display) is not started.

In addition, when the time saving state is ended, that is, when the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game reaches the time saving number of times, and the symbol fluctuation is stopped (time saving). When the last symbol change in the state is stopped), "2 seconds" is set in the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol change display is started. set. As described above, in the time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is changed to the open state, and then the second starting port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, by setting "2 seconds" in the interval timer when the last symbol change in the time-saving state stops and the time-saving state ends, the symbol change of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state is started before the start. (Ii) The starting port 2004 can be changed to the closed state, whereby it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a starting prize for the second starting port 2004 after the symbol variation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started.

The period set in the interval timer when the last symbol fluctuation in the time-saving state stops and the time-saving state ends is at least equivalent to the opening time of the second major winning opening 2006 in the time-saving state (in this example, "1. 5 seconds ") or more. Also, if the second big winning opening 2006 has not changed to the open state when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops and the time saving state ends, it is set as the waiting time until the next special symbol fluctuation display is started. The same time as usual (“0.5 seconds” in this example) may be set.

In this way, when the final special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (when the last symbol change in the time saving state is stopped), regardless of the presence or absence of the first holding number and the second holding number, the predetermined period By suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (winning judgment) over a period of time, the time saving control that can be continued after the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (after the last symbol change in the time saving state is stopped). Is completed within the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of second holds after the end of the time saving control. As a result, the game progresses in an unintended behavior of the game designer that a start winning prize is generated in the second start port 2004 and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-time saving state. Since it can be prevented and the game progress (the game property intended by the game designer) can be suitably realized in the behavior intended by the game designer, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by not giving the player a sense of discomfort. ..

In the above example, the determination of whether or not the time reduction state is performed (determination of whether or not the time reduction state is terminated) is performed when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Although what is performed as a reference is shown, when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started to determine whether or not the time is shortened (for example, the above-mentioned normal symbol normal process (step S803)). Is executed, or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is executed), it may be performed as a reference. In this case, at least, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation (normal symbol fluctuation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example) executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time reduction state, and the time reduction state. The opening time of the second prize opening 2006 (“1.5 seconds” in this example) and the total period (“2.3 seconds” in this example) or more may be set.

[11. Hold notice production and hold change production]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the hold display is displayed until the hold display is exhausted. By changing the above, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests a jackpot expectation for a variable display of a decorative symbol (variable display of a special symbol) based on the hold display. In addition, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change.

Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the hold number designation command and the pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310. .. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the hold number designation command and the pre-determination command in the command analysis process of step S601, the hold notice determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command. Select the hold notice determination table corresponding to the (number of pending storages) and the advance judgment information (either big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) specified from the advance judgment command, and the judgment set in the hold notice decision table. By comparing the value with the read random number for determining the hold notice, the type of the hold notice pattern set in the hold notice determination table is determined. In the hold notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold notice pattern is different for each advance judgment information (either big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) specified from the advance judgment command, and each hold is made. The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

In addition, when a game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of holds (number of hold memories) specified by the hold number designation command increases, so that the effect is displayed. One hold display is added to and displayed on the device 1600. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored items) specified by the hold number specification command is reduced. , The hold display on the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern, and the hold display and the hold display are displayed. Allows the display mode of the hold display to be changed each time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on another hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied). In the present embodiment, the hold display is deleted when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), but the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol is deleted. Even after the start of the variable display (variable display of the special symbol), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changed. In such a case, before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display, the position where the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 moves like other hold displays. It may be suggested that the display mode of the hold display may be changed by executing the hold change effect (hold move change effect, moguri hold change effect, billiard hold change effect) described later.

Next, a hold notice determination table in which a plurality of types of hold notice patterns are set for each hold number (hold storage number) specified from the hold number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145. The hold notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 144 (A) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (hold number = 1), and FIG. 144 (B) is a hold notice decision to be used when hold 2 is lit (hold number = 2). It is a table, FIG. 144 (C) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 3 is lit (hold number = 3), and FIG. 145 (D) is used when hold 4 is lit (hold number = 4). It is a hold notice decision table to be done.

As described above, a plurality of types of hold notice patterns are set in the hold notice determination table corresponding to the number of holds (hold memory number), and these hold notice patterns include the number of holds (hold) at the time of winning. How the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 changes each time the hold memory is consumed is set by the amount of the number of memories). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 may change in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 1 is lit (number of holds = 1). There is no (that is, it only digests the hold display), and a hold notice pattern in which only the display mode of the hold display for one time is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 2 is lit (number of holds = 2), the display mode of the hold display can be changed once before the hold display is exhausted. Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for two times is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 3 is lit (number of holds = 3), the display mode of the hold display can be changed twice before the hold display is exhausted. Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for three times is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), the display mode of the hold display can be changed three times before the hold display is exhausted. Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for four times is set is associated.

Further, as the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 set in the hold notice pattern, four displays are displayed so that the hold display is displayed in any of white (basic color), blue, red, and rainbow color. Aspects are provided. Then, when determining the hold notice pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the display mode of the hold display changing to the end, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color. It is set to be. That is, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the pre-judgment information, a hold notice pattern having a high expectation of big hit (for example, rainbow color) is determined with a high probability as the final display mode of the hold display, and in advance. When the lottery result is specified as a loss (loss, reach loss) as the judgment information, a hold notice pattern having a low expectation of big hit (for example, white) is determined with a high probability as the final display mode of the hold display. Therefore, when the display mode of the final hold display is displayed in the display mode with high expectation of big hit, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increasing.

In the hold notice pattern, the display mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → red → rainbow color, and the display mode of the hold display is maintained when the hold display is exhausted. Alternatively, the following display mode is set so that the display mode has a high expectation of a big hit. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation, there is a possibility that the display mode may change to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation when the hold display is exhausted. The aspect can be noticed with expectation until the end.

Further, in the hold notice pattern, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the hold display in the order of blue → red → rainbow color after the display mode of the hold display is displayed in white (basic color), and the display in the middle of not being white (basic color). Start from the mode (for example, suddenly start in rainbow color due to the hold notice pattern number 4 when hold 1 is lit), or skip one or more display modes and change to the next display mode (for example, when hold 2 is lit). It is also set to change from white (basic color) to rainbow color according to the hold notice pattern number 7. Therefore, even if the chance of changing the display mode of the hold display (the number of holds) is small, it is possible to display the display mode of the hold display in the display mode with a high expectation of big hit. Further, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low expectation of big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change to, and the display mode of the hold display is changed to the end. It can be noticed with expectation.

Further, in the hold notice determination table, only when a big hit is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, the hold notice pattern (hold notice pattern number when hold 1 is lit) is displayed in rainbow color as the final display mode of the hold display. 4. Hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10 when hold 2 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, when hold 3 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, etc. when hold 4 is lit) are determined. Is set to be possible. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is confirmed that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is exhausted, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increasing. ..

Further, in the hold notice determination table, when a loss is specified as the pre-judgment information from the pre-judgment command, the hold notice pattern (when hold 1 is lit) becomes white (basic color) or blue as the final display mode of the hold display. Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 2 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 3 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 4 is lit, etc.) On the other hand, when a big hit, a small hit, or a reach is specified as the pre-judgment information from the pre-judgment command, the hold notice pattern that turns red as the final hold display display mode (hold notice pattern when hold 1 is lit) Number 3, hold notice pattern numbers 3, 6 and 8 when hold 2 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 3 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 4 is lit, etc.) Is set to be possible. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in red, it is confirmed that the reach effect is at least reached when the hold display is exhausted, and the player's expectations for the big hit game and the small hit game are expected. Is increasing.

In the present embodiment, by determining the hold notice pattern at the start of displaying the hold display, a series of contents in which the display mode of the hold display changes until the hold display is digested are determined. However, as a determination method thereof, at the start of the display of the hold display, only the display mode of the hold display at the start and the final display mode of the hold display may be determined. Then, when the display mode of the hold display at the start and the display mode of the final hold display are different, the display mode of the final hold display is at least before the target hold display is digested. Is displayed, it may be determined how the display mode of the hold display changes each time the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can be changed comes. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is digested.

Next, a hold change effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change during the display period of the hold display will be described below. In the above-mentioned hold notice effect, the display mode of the hold display can be changed each time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the hold display. At the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed, the hold change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed.

Specifically, on the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), does the display mode of the hold display change based on the hold notice pattern? By determining whether or not, the pending change effect determination table corresponding to the determination result is selected, and the determination value set in the pending change effect determination table is compared with the read random number for determining the pending change effect. Hold change effect determination Determines the type of hold change effect pattern set in the table. That is, whether or not to execute the hold change effect, and when executing the hold change effect, determine the type of the hold change effect.

As shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of types of hold change effect patterns are set in the hold change effect determination table, and the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect, Hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) that executes hold move change effect as hold change effect, hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) that executes moguri hold change effect as hold change effect, hold change As the effect, a hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing the billiard hold change effect is set. The pending change effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in the hold change effect determination table, the determination values are distributed to each of the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect, and the appearance rate of each hold change effect is the same. Is about the same, but the distribution of the judgment values may be different so that the appearance rate of each pending change effect is different.

Further, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) that execute the hold change effect. On the other hand, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change, most of the determinations are made for the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect. The values are sorted. In this way, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the hold change effect is always executed, and when the hold change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes with a high probability. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold change effect.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holdings (the number of holding storages) is four, but the number of holdings corresponding to the number of holdings can be displayed at the four corners of the rectangular display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, when hold 1 (number of holds = 1) is lit, the hold display is displayed at the lower left position of the display area, and when hold 2 (number of holds = 2) is lit, hold is held at the lower right position of the display area. The display is displayed, and when the hold 3 (hold number = 3) is lit, the hold display is displayed at the upper right position of the display area, and when the hold 4 (hold number = 4) is lit, the hold is held at the upper left position of the display area. The display is displayed. In addition, as a general rule, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display of the hold 1 displayed at the lower left position of the display area is deleted. As a result, the other hold displays 2 to 4 are moved clockwise while being displayed in the display area.

First, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) in which the hold change effect is not executed, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, it is moved from the position before the move. It is designed to move linearly to the position of the shortest distance.

Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) that executes the hold move change effect as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, it is before the movement. Unlike the case where the hold change effect is not executed from the position of to the position after the movement, the movement is performed in a non-linear manner, and the hold display is displayed during the movement (before reaching the position after the movement). The display mode of is changeable. In addition, when the hold change effect is executed, the period until the hold display reaches the position after the move is compared with the case where the hold display moves linearly (when the hold change effect is not executed). There is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change. Further, in the hold change effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided in which the mode in which the hold display moves is different from that in the case where the hold change effect is not executed, and the hold display moves linearly (hold change effect). The longer the distance traveled (when not executed), the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change. In the present embodiment, the longer the distance that the hold display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes. However, as another example, at first glance, regardless of the distance that the hold display moves. The more complicated the mode in which the hold display moves (for example, the number of intersections as the movement route of the hold display is large), the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes. Further, as another example of the hold movement change effect, the longer the distance that the hold display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes to the display mode (for example, rainbow color) with a high expectation of big hit. It may be set.

Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) that executes the hold change effect as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, it is before the movement. When the hold display moves from the position to the outside of the display area, it is temporarily erased, and after a predetermined time elapses, the hold display returns to the display area and reaches the moved position. Therefore, the display mode of the hold display can be changed. In addition, when the hold change effect is executed, the position after the hold display is moved as compared with the case where the hold change effect is not executed (when the hold display is not erased outside the display area and moves linearly). There is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change during the period until the time is reached. Further, in the moguri hold change effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different times for erasing the hold display are provided outside the display area, and the longer the erasure time is, the more the display mode of the hold display can be changed. The sex is high. As another example of the moguri hold change effect, the longer the hold display is erased outside the display area, the more likely the hold display display mode will change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, rainbow color). May be set to be high.

Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) that executes the billiard hold change effect as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, the billiard ball is displayed. If a similar sphere display appears in a predetermined display mode, the sphere display bounces multiple times within the display area, and then the sphere display collides with the hold display at the moved position, the sphere display is displayed. Is a new hold display, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed to the display mode of the ball display depending on whether or not the ball display collides. That is, when the billiard hold change effect is not executed, the ball display does not appear and the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold display reaches the position after the movement, whereas the billiard hold change effect is performed. When executed, the ball display appears, and it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display after the hold display reaches the position after the movement. In addition, when the billiard hold change effect is executed, the hold display moves as a result of the hold compared to the case where the hold change effect is not executed (when the hold display moves linearly and the ball display does not appear). There is a high possibility that the display mode of the display will change. In the present embodiment, even when the effect display different from the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (the effect display accompanied by the variation display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern) changes. Billiard hold It is possible to perform the same effect as the change effect. Specifically, when a sphere display similar to a billiard ball appears in a predetermined display mode, the sphere display bounces a plurality of times in the display area, and then the sphere display collides with the effect display, the sphere display is not included. The production display changes. Therefore, even when the ball display does not collide with the hold display, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the effect display changes due to the collision with the effect display.

In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect and the hold change effect are performed in the non-time saving state. In the non-time saving state, the holding memory on the second special symbol side based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 2004 is hardly generated, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002. Since the hold storage on the first special symbol side can occur, only the hold display based on the hold storage on the first special symbol side is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, in the non-time saving state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area in which the effect display accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern is performed and the symbol display area. It is divided into a hold display area in which hold display is performed corresponding to the number of hold storages on the special symbol side. Specifically, the symbol display area is reduced to about 80% of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this way, in the non-time saving state, the hold display area is separately provided so that the hold display displayed in the hold display area can be made conspicuous, and the display mode of the hold display changes depending on the execution of the hold notice effect. It makes it easier to pay attention to whether or not to do it. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit is low, and it is difficult to expect the variable display and the effect display of the decorative symbol performed in the symbol display area, but it is displayed in the hold display area. Since the hold display to be displayed is made conspicuous, it can be expected that the display mode of the hold display will change, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold notice effect and the hold change effect are performed during the normal fluctuation, which is the stage of whether or not the reach state is formed at the time of displaying the change of the decorative symbol. Further, when the hold change effect is not executed, the symbol display area remains reduced to about 80% of the display area, whereas when the hold change effect is executed, 60% of the display area is further reduced. The symbol display area is reduced to the extent. In this way, when the symbol display area changes from about 80% to about 60% of the display area, the hold change effect is performed on the hold display displayed in the hold display area. Therefore, the symbol display area is displayed. When the number decreases, it can be expected that the hold change effect will be performed for the hold display. Further, when the hold change effect is executed, the hold display area is expanded so that the effect content of the hold change effect for the hold display displayed in the hold display area can be made conspicuous, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed. It makes it easier to pay attention to how it changes. The hold display area is provided as an area for waiting for the hold display and moving the hold display regardless of whether or not the hold change effect is executed for the hold display. It is permissible to move the hold display across the symbol display area as part of the execution time of.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reach state is formed as the variation display of the decorative symbol during the normal variation, the symbol display area is returned to 100% of the display area as the hold display area is erased. .. That is, after the reach state is formed, the reach effect is performed using the symbol display area returned to 100%. In this way, when the reach effect is executed, the symbol display area is expanded to change from the state in which the hold display can be noticed during the normal state, and the reach effect as the effect display displayed in the symbol display area is obtained. It can be noticed.

In the present embodiment, the symbol display area is reduced to about 60% of the display area when any of the hold movement change effect, the moguri hold change effect, and the billiard hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect. , The rate at which the symbol display area is reduced may be different depending on the degree of expectation of the hold change effect to be executed (the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change). For example, when executing a hold change effect in which the display mode of the hold display is likely to change, the rate at which the symbol display area is reduced is increased, whereas the display mode of the hold display is unlikely to change. When executing the hold change effect, the rate at which the symbol display area is reduced may be reduced. According to this, it is not always necessary to grasp the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes by executing the hold change effect, but it can also be grasped by the rate at which the symbol display area decreases.

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the hold change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149. FIG. 147 is a specific production example of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the hold movement change effect, and FIG. 148 is a specific effect example of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the moguri hold change effect. Yes, FIG. 149 is a specific example of the effect of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the billiard hold change effect.

First, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the hold movement change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 147 (A), in the non-time saving state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area 1600a that occupies about 80% of the display area and the symbol display area 1600a. It is divided into a hold display area 1600b that occupies about 20% of the display area. In the symbol display area 1600a, an effect display including a variation display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c and a symbol background display (symbol background image) around the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is performed based on the variation pattern. On the other hand, in the hold display area 1600b, the hold display corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side and the hold background display (hold background image) around the hold display are performed. Hold display 1601a at the lower left position of the display area, hold display 1601b of hold 2 at the lower right position of the display area, hold display 1601c of hold 3 at the upper right position of the display area, upper left of the display area. The hold display 1601d of hold 4 is displayed at the position of, and the hold background display is displayed in other parts. This reserved background display is displayed in a mode different from that of the symbol background display (for example, a different background color), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a symbol display area 1600a and a hold display area 1600b. It is easy to recognize that. Further, the hold displays 1601a to 1601d of the hold 1 to 4 have a white display mode. Further, with respect to the hold display 1601d of the hold 4, when the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 is lit, the display mode changes from white → blue → red → rainbow color (hold notice pattern when the hold 4 is lit). Number 18) has been determined.

Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the hold movement change effect is executed for the hold display 1601d of the hold 4. The symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60% and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40% based on the determination of. Further, as the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased, the other hold displays 1601b to 1601d of the hold 2 to 4 start moving clockwise while being displayed in the display area. Further, the hold displays 1601b and 1601c of the hold 2 and 3 are moved to the position after the movement based on the determination that the hold change effect is not executed for the hold displays 1601b and 1601c of the hold 2 and 3. While moving linearly at the shortest distance, the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 reaches the position after the move based on the decision to execute the hold movement change effect with respect to the hold display 1601d of the hold 4. , Move while meandering. In this production example, the display mode is changed from white to blue while the hold display 1601d of hold 4 is being moved. As for the change in the display mode during the movement of the hold display, for example, the color at the start of the movement (white in this production example) is maintained until the intermediate point of the movement path is reached, but the intermediate point is not changed. Gradation change that gradually approaches the color after movement (blue in this production example) is performed from the time when it reaches, and the change to the color after movement (blue in this production example) is completed when the movement is completed. Etc. can be exemplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), after the lapse of a predetermined time, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c, but before the predetermined time elapses, the reserved symbols 2 to 4 are displayed. Has finished moving the hold display 1601b to 1601d. At this point, the hold display 1601a and 1601b of the new hold 1 and 2 have a white display mode, whereas the hold display 1601c of the new hold 3 has a blue display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started again based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased. The hold displays 1601b and 1601c of hold 2 and 3 other than the above start moving clockwise while being displayed in the display area. Further, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 linearly moves to the position after the move by the shortest distance based on the determination that the hold change effect is not executed for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. On the other hand, the hold display 1601c of the hold 3 meanders to the position after the move based on the decision to execute the hold movement change effect with respect to the hold display 1601c of the hold 3. In this production example, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601c of hold 3 is being moved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), after the lapse of a predetermined time, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c, but before the lapse of the predetermined time, the reserved symbols 2 and 3 are displayed. Has completed the movement of the hold display 1601b and 1601c. At this point, the hold display 1601a of the new hold 1 has a white display mode, whereas the hold display 1601b of the new hold 2 has a red display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started again based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased. The hold display 1601b of hold 2 other than the above starts moving clockwise while being displayed in the display area. Further, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves while meandering to the position after the move based on the decision to execute the hold movement change effect with respect to the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. In this production example, it is recognized that when the display mode of the hold display changes from white to blue and blue to red, the hold display is longer than the distance traveled and the display mode of the hold display is likely to change. can. Further, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves, it crosses the front side of the symbol display area 1600a, so it is easy to pay attention to whether or not the display mode changes. Further, in this production example, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is being moved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), after the lapse of a predetermined time, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c, but the hold 2 is held before the predetermined time elapses. The movement of the display 1601b is completed. At this point, the new hold display 1601a of hold 1 has a display mode of rainbow color, but when the display mode is displayed in rainbow color, the lottery result is a big hit when the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game.

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the moguri hold change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the hold display area 1600b, hold display corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side is performed, but in this production example, hold is held at the lower left position of the display area. The hold display 1601a of 1 and the hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed at the lower right position of the display area. Further, the hold display 1601a of hold 1 and the hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed in white. Further, for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is lit, the hold notice pattern whose display mode changes from white to red (hold notice pattern number 6 when the hold 2 is lit) is determined. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is also subjected to the execution of the hold change effect. The symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60% and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40% based on the determination of. Further, as the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is moved out of the display area and temporarily erased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 148 (C) and 148 (D), after the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves out of the display area, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves out of the display area toward the moved position. The light is moved within the display area as if the light emitted from the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is moving as the light is moved. Further, as the light moves in the display area, the countdown of "3", "2", "1", and "0" is displayed. This countdown corresponds to the time when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is erased, and the longer the erased time, the closer the countdown approaches to "0". That is, when the time to be erased is long, the countdown can reach "0", whereas when the time to be erased is short, the countdown ends without reaching "0".

Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), after the time elapsed for erasing the hold display 1601b of the hold 2, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 returns to the hold display area 1600b, but at the time of the return, The display mode is changed to red. After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), the movement of the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is completed before the variation display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is stopped and displayed. At this point, the new hold 1 hold display 1601a has a red display mode, but when the display mode is displayed in red, it reaches at least reach when the hold 1 hold display 1601a is digested. Since it is confirmed that the effect is to be executed, the player's expectations for the big hit game and the small hit game can be raised.

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the billiard hold change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 149 (A), in the hold display area 1600b, hold display corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side is performed, but in this production example, hold is held at the lower left position of the display area. The hold display 1601a of 1 and the hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed at the lower right position of the display area. The display mode of the hold display of the hold 1 and 2 is white. Further, for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is lit, the hold notice pattern whose display mode changes from white to red (hold notice pattern number 6 when the hold 2 is lit) is determined. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the billiard hold change effect is executed for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. The symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60% and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40% based on the determination of. Further, as the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is first determined to execute the billiard hold change effect with respect to the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. It moves linearly to the position after movement at the shortest distance while the display mode is maintained in white. Further, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves, the ball display 1602 resembling a billiard ball appears in the hold display area 1600b in a red display mode. At this point, if the sphere display 1602 appears in the red display mode, the hold display 1601a of the new hold 1 may change to the red display mode by executing the billiard hold change effect. It is possible to raise the expectations of the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), when the sphere display 1602 appears in the hold display area 1600b, an image that imitates the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed in the display area, and the center pressing is displayed. The operation unit 303a is urged to be operated by the player. Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), when the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a within a predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is fired and the ball display 1602 is bounced a plurality of times in the display area. Let me. On the other hand, even if the player does not operate the central pressing operation unit 303a within the predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is forcibly fired after the lapse of the predetermined time. Further, in this effect example, an operation effect of whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a is performed, but at the present time, the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c are being displayed in a variable time (variable pattern). When the set fluctuation time) is 4 seconds or less (when the waiting time for whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a cannot be provided), the ball is not produced. Fire display 1602. When the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, it crosses the front side of the symbol display area 1600a, so that it is easy to pay attention to the ball display 1602.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 149 (E) and 149 (F), after the sphere display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the sphere display 1602 collides with the hold display 1601a of hold 1, and the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is pushed out. In this way, the ball display 1602 becomes the hold display 1601a of the new hold 1. As a result, the display mode of the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 changes to red, which is the display mode of the sphere display 1602, before the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is stopped and displayed. At this point, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 has a red display mode, but when the display mode is displayed in red, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is at least reachable at the time of digestion of the hold display 1601a to produce a reach effect. Since it is confirmed to be executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game and the small hit game can be raised. In this production example, when the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, only the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is displayed, and the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 changes to the red display mode due to the collision with the ball display 1602. Although it may change, when two or more hold displays are displayed in the hold display area, which hold display collides with the ball display 1602, that is, which hold display is in red. It is not possible to determine if it may change to. Therefore, when two or more hold displays are displayed in the hold display area, one of the hold displays changes to a red display mode (display mode of the ball display 1602) due to a collision of the ball display 1602. It is possible to pay attention to the direction in which the ball display 1602 advances while having the expectation of.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, it is possible to execute an effect equivalent to the billiard hold change effect. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 149 (E'), after the sphere display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the sphere display 1602 collides with the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (F'), the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, and an effect display for notifying that the "special mode" is entered appears as a new effect display. It is designed to do. Therefore, even when the ball display 1602 does not collide with the hold display, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the effect display changes due to the collision with the effect display.

In the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the color is changed as the display mode of the hold display, but the color is not limited to the change at the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed. It is also possible to "add a predetermined additional decorative display (character, etc.) to the hold display". In such a case, the jackpot expectation is made different depending on the type of the additional decorative display added to the hold display.

In addition to the above-mentioned configuration of the hold notice effect, when the hold move change effect is executed as the hold change effect, not only the color change but also the process of moving the hold display "predetermined additional decoration display on the hold display". (Character, etc.) may be added. For example, when the hold display moves due to the execution of the hold movement change effect, the additional decoration display appears in the display area in the middle of the movement, the additional decoration display approaches the hold display, and is added to the hold display at the position after the movement. You may try to perform the production of whether or not it is done.

In addition to the above-mentioned configuration of the hold notice effect, when the hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect, the hold display is displayed after the hold display moves out of the display area, not limited to the color change. When returning to the area, "a predetermined additional decorative display (character or the like) may be added to the hold display". For example, after the hold display moves out of the display area due to the execution of the moguri hold change effect, the additional decoration display appears in the display area, the additional decoration display moves out of the display area in the same way as the hold display, and the hold display changes. When returning to the display area, the effect of whether or not the additional decorative display is added may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced from about 80% to about 60% of the display area, while the hold display area 1600b is reduced from about 20% of the display area, triggered by the start of the hold change effect. It is increased to about 40%. As described above, in the hold change effect, the hold display area 1600b is expanded, and the hold background display effect that excites the hold change effect is also executed by using the expanded hold display area 1600b. When executing the background movement change effect as the hold change effect, for example, the hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b is replaced with one consisting of the character group of "chance!" While the hold display is moving. You may. Further, when the hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect, for example, as the hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, the hold display "appears" while moving (erasing) to the outside of the display area. You may replace it with one that consists of an explanatory message such as "If the color changes when you do, you have a chance!" In addition, when the billiard hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect, for example, as the hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, during the period when the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, "a chance if the ball is hit! It may be replaced with one consisting of an explanatory message such as ".

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is used as a display area in which the symbol display area 1600a and the hold display area 1600b are provided, but two display devices are provided and a display area composed of the two display devices is provided. However, even if the symbol display area 1600a and the hold display area 1600b are divided into the hold display area 1600b and the hold change effect is started, the symbol display area 1600a is decreased while the hold display area 1600b is increased. good. For example, when the symbol display area 1600a is provided in the display device having a large display area and the hold display area 1600b is provided in the display device having a small display area among the two display devices, the start of the hold change effect is used as an opportunity. The display devices provided with the symbol display area 1600a and the hold display area 1600b may be interchanged.

[12. Directing at the time of over winning in the jackpot game]
In the present embodiment, when executing the big hit game, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are limited to a predetermined number of rounds (up to 14 rounds in this embodiment) determined in advance according to the big hit type. Is opened (the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are made ready to accept the game ball B), and a round game is performed. One round game is until the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment), and the first prize is won during one round game. Until the specified number of game balls B (upper limit number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) wins in the opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006, or the specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) ) Will be released until it elapses.

In the above-mentioned one round game, when the specified number of game balls B (upper limit number of prizes: 10 balls in this example) is won in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, the game balls B are being opened. It closes a certain first prize opening 2005 or second prize opening 2006. That is, when the first prize opening 2005 is open, the first attacker closes the first prize opening 2005 when the specified number of game balls B are detected by the first count sensor 2512. The solenoid 2515 is driven and controlled, but at that time, the number of game balls B that exceeds the specified number may have already entered the first major winning opening 2005 (over winning). In such a case, After the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed, the first count sensor 2512 detects the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number. Similarly, when the second prize opening 2006 is open, the second attacker solenoid closes the second prize opening 2006 when the specified number of game balls B are detected by the second count sensor 2513. The 2516 is driven and controlled, but at that time, the number of game balls B that exceeds the specified number may have already entered the second major winning opening 2006 (over winning), and in such a case, the first After the two major winning openings 2006 are closed, the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number is detected by the second count sensor 2513. Then, when an over-winning occurs, as a privilege for the player to obtain the payout of the game ball B exceeding the expectation, a production using the production display device 1600 is used separately from the round production performed in the round game. As an over-winning production.

Specifically, every time a round game in a big hit game is started, a round start command instructing the number of rounds of the round game is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Further, when the game ball B wins the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 and the game ball B is detected by the first count sensor 2512 or the second count sensor 2513, the game ball B is detected from the main control board 1310. A winning command is sent to notify you. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the round start command and the winning command, in the jackpot effect processing of step S714, the number of rounds of the round game being executed, the first winning opening 2005, or the second winning prize An effect based on the number of game balls B winning in the mouth 2006 is executed as a round effect on the effect display device 1600. In addition, during each round game in the jackpot game, after a specified number of game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening is further won. It is determined whether or not the game ball B has won a prize in 2006, that is, whether or not an over-winning has occurred, and if an over-winning has occurred, the number of times the over-winning has occurred is counted during the execution of the jackpot game. do. However, even if two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of times the over-winnings occur is 1 count.

Then, when an over-winning occurs, the over-winning effect is executed as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but if the type of the over-winning effect differs depending on the number of times the above-mentioned over-winning occurs. I'm letting you. Specifically, when the number of over-winning occurrences is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, one of the characters A to E is determined, and the determined character appears in a lottery effect. On the other hand, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, a fixed effect is executed in which the character corresponding to the number of times the over-winning has occurred appears. .. In addition, when the number of times over prizes have occurred is the count from the 8th time onward, a premier fixed effect that does not appear in the counts up to the 7th time is executed.

First, when the number of times over-winning has occurred is an odd number of 1, 3, 5, or 7, the character A is used for the over-winning effect using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (A). Determine which of ~ E to appear. Specifically, the type of character set in the over-winning effect determination table is determined by comparing the judgment value set in the over-winning effect determination table with the read random number for over-winning effect determination. do. In this way, when the number of times the over-winning occurs is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, any of the characters A to E is determined, so that when the over-winning occurs. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to which character appears as an effect at the time of over winning.

The over-winning effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in the over-winning effect determination table, the distribution of the judgment values for the patterns in which each character appears among the characters A to E is about the same, and the appearance rate of each character is about the same. The distribution may be different so that the appearance rate of each character is different.

Further, when the number of times the over-winning occurs is an even number of two times, it is decided to make the character F appear in the over-winning effect using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (B). do. Similarly, when the number of times the over-winning occurs is an even number of four times, the character G is made to appear in the over-winning effect by using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (C). When the decision is made and the number of times the over-winning occurs is an even number of 6 times, the character H is made to appear in the over-winning effect using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (D). decide. In this way, when the number of times over-winning has occurred is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, a predetermined character is determined according to the number of times over-winning has occurred, so that over-winning is performed. When is generated, it is possible to recognize how many times the over-winning has occurred due to the appearance of the character.

In addition, when the number of times the over-winning occurs is the count from the 8th time onward, all the characters A to H appear in the over-winning effect using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (E). Decide to let. In this way, when the number of times the over-winning occurs is the count up to the 7th time, the character appears only alone in the over-winning effect, whereas when the count is the 8th time or later, the character is over. Since all of the characters A to H appear in the winning production, it is possible to obtain a sense of accomplishment that the number of over-winning occurrences exceeds the eighth while paying attention to the premier production.

In the present embodiment, when the number of times over winning occurs is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, one of the characters A to E is determined, and the determined character appears in a lottery effect. On the other hand, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, a fixed effect is executed in which the character corresponding to the number of times the over-winning has occurred appears. .. As a result, it is possible to give different enjoyment to the over-winning effect depending on whether the number of over-winning occurrences is an odd number count of 1, 3, 5, or 7 times or an even number count of 2, 4, or 6 times. can. That is, when the number of times over-winning has occurred is an even number of 2, 4, or 6, while recognizing the number of times over-winning has occurred due to the appearance of the character, 1, 3, 5 In the case of an odd count of 7 times, it is possible to give the pleasure of paying attention to whether any of the characters A to E appears.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of times the over-winnings occur is 1 count. As a result, the over-winning effect is not executed twice during one round game, and the over-winning effect can be easily recognized for each round game in which the over-winning occurs. Further, for example, if two over-winnings occur and the number of times the over-winnings occur is 2 counts, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are not executed in order (for example, over during the round game after the lottery effect). Even if a prize is won, the lottery effect is executed and the lottery effect is continuous), so that the effect that the player was looking forward to may not be executed, but in this embodiment, such a situation can be prevented. can.

Next, a specific example of the effect of the effect display device 1600 when the jackpot game is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 151.

As shown in FIG. 151 (A), during the execution of the jackpot game, as a round effect using the effect display device 1600, the number of rounds of the round game being executed, the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize The effect of displaying the total number of prize balls won (total number of payouts) for winning the prize in the mouth 2006 is being executed. The display of the total number of acquisitions is based on the fact that the game ball B has won the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, and the number of acquisitions (payout number) according to the number of winnings is updated (additional display). ), And unlike the above-mentioned over-winning production, even if two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of acquisitions according to each winning number ( It is added so as to reflect all the payouts). That is, when two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of executions of the over-winning effect is limited, but the update of the total number of winnings display is not limited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), when an over-winning occurs during each round game, the over-winning effect is started as an effect using the effect display device 1600, and first, the effect display device 1600 From the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 provided at the lower right of the above, the effect display as if light is gathered is executed toward the central portion of the effect display device 1600. As a result, when the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number is won in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, that is, when an over prize occurs, the player can easily notice that fact, and then. You can pay attention to the characters that appear in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), in the over-winning effect, characters appear according to the number of times the above-mentioned over-winning occurs. Specifically, when the number of over-winning occurrences is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, the lottery effect in which any of the characters A to E appears is executed, whereas the over-winning is performed. When the number of times the prize has been generated is an even number of 2, 4, or 6, a fixed effect is executed in which the character corresponding to the number of times the over prize has occurred appears. In addition, when the number of times the over-winning occurs is the count from the 8th time onward, a premier fixed effect in which all the characters A to H appear is executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned over-winning effect, the effect display device 1600 is used to make characters appear according to the number of times over-winning occurs. At the time of starting, the production at the time of over winning is finished, and the appearing character is erased. Then, at the start of the round game, by resuming the round production corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game, it is not overlooked that the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 have been opened. .. In this production example, when the next round game is started when an over-winning occurs during the round game, the over-winning production is finished, but a predetermined time (for example,) from the time when the over-winning occurs. Execute the over-winning effect for 4 to 5 seconds), and continue the over-winning effect until the specified time elapses, even if the next round game is started after the over-winning occurs. It may be. In such a case, since the over-winning effect is always executed for a predetermined time due to the occurrence of the over-winning, the over-winning effect can be enjoyed comfortably.

In addition, the above-mentioned over-winning effect is to be performed when the number of game balls B exceeds the specified number (over-winning) in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006. However, if an over-winning occurs in the first major winning opening 2005, which has a specific area inside, there is no directing at the time of over-winning, and only when an over-winning occurs in the second major winning opening 2006, the over-winning is done. You may try to produce the time. In the present embodiment, when the first big winning opening 2005 passes through the specific area, the big hit confirmation effect indicating that the execution of the big hit game is confirmed is performed. However, according to the above configuration, the specific area to be passed is specified. It is possible to prevent the execution of the jackpot confirmation effect from being hindered by the accidental occurrence of over-winning at the game timing of.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned over-winning effect, the lower right flock winning opening (for example, the lower right of the effect display device 1600) provided in the vicinity of the second big winning opening 2006 during the big hit game. When a game ball wins in the general prize opening 2001) provided in the above, a bonus effect indicating that a bonus prize ball different from the prize ball for winning the game ball in the second major prize opening 2006 is given is performed. You may. In such a case, it can be exemplified to control so as to suppress the execution of either one so as to prevent the overlap between the over-winning effect and the bonus effect. For example, if a game ball wins in the lower right flock winning opening during the execution of the over-winning effect, the execution of the bonus effect is suppressed, whereas if the over-winning occurs during the execution of the bonus effect, , It is possible to give priority to the effect being executed, such as suppressing the execution of the effect at the time of over winning. However, regardless of whether the execution conditions of the over-winning effect and the bonus effect are satisfied, the prize balls will be paid out, and the total number of prize balls acquired (total number of payouts) in the round effect using the effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be added to the display of.

As described above, when the over-winning effect is not executed even though the over-winning occurs, it is not counted as the number of times the over-winning occurs. As a result, when the over-winning effect is executed next time, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are executed in order with respect to the already executed over-winning effect, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Can be prevented.

In the above, when an over-winning occurs during the execution of the bonus effect, the execution of the over-winning effect is suppressed, but only when the number of times the over-winning occurs is the 8th or later count. It may be replaced with the over-winning production (premier fixed production). In this way, when the number of times over-winning has occurred is the count after the 8th time, by surely executing the premier production as the over-winning production, the number of times over-winning has occurred is 8th or later. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a loss such as not being able to see the premier production even though the count is.

[13. Modification example of light emission display of light guide plate]
Next, a modified example of the light emission display of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are mounted on the first LED group 2630a and the second LED group 2630b in response to the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301. , The third LED group 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d are made to emit light in this order, and the first picture 2614a, the second picture 2614b, the third picture 2614c, and the fourth picture 2614d are made to emit light in this order, and the center of the front light guide plate 2610. It produces a light-emitting effect like an animation with a movement that spreads from the outside to the outside.

Specifically, when the decorative symbols in the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (“7” in this example) as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600, all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed to form a reach state. The decorative design of the above is reduced to the lower left of the effect display device 1600, and the first LED group 2630a among the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light as a reach effect, etc. (I) By injecting light from the specific light input unit 2612a, the first pattern 2614a surrounding the vicinity of the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light, and the effect display device is visible through the portion surrounded by the first pattern 2614a. "Press the button!" Is displayed on the 1600 (FIG. 152 (A)).

Then, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), the decorative symbols in the left column are reduced and displayed in the lower left of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbols in the right column are displayed in an effect. While the display is reduced to the lower right of the device 1600, the decorative design in the middle row is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 so that it can be visually recognized through the portion surrounded by the first pattern 2614a, and then the decorative design in the middle row is displayed on the left. A symbol (“6” in this example) different from the decorative symbols in the columns and the right column is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 152 (B)).

Next, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are made to emit light in the order of the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, and the second specific light enters into the light guide plate main body 2611. By incident light from the unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d, the second pattern 2614b (FIG. 152 (B)), the third pattern 2614c (FIG. 152 (C)), The fourth pattern 2614d (FIG. 152 (D)) is made to emit light in this order, and a light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is performed.

In the front effect unit 2600 of this example, a reflector (not shown) attached to a part of the right side of the front light guide plate 2610 and a reflector attached to the upper surface of the reflector toward the right side of the front light guide plate 2610. A front light guide plate decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs 2660 that irradiate light are mounted, and a light emitting from each of the plurality of LEDs 2660s provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660s are collected to increase the intensity of the light. It includes a light collecting member 2670 and. Further, on the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, a plurality of fine reflection recesses 2616 for reflecting the light incident from the plurality of LEDs 2660 forward are formed.

Then, by causing the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 to emit light in the order of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, the first pattern 2614a , The second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are made to emit light in this order, and a light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is performed several times (1). After that, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are mounted on the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group. By stopping one of the 2630d in a light emitting state and causing a plurality of LEDs 2660 to emit light to inject light into the light guide plate main body 2611 from the upper right side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the picture 2614 (first picture 2614a to The shot-out pattern 2615 in the form of shooting through the decorative pattern in the middle row, which is visible through the center of the fourth pattern 2614d), is made to emit light, and the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked by being shot by the shot-out pattern 2615. The mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 152 (D)). At this time, in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 2660, an arrow of light is emitted toward the center of the front light guide plate 2610 to the effect display device 1600 located at the back of the light guide plate main body 2611 to shoot through the center of the pattern 2614. By performing such an effect display and then disappearing this image, the shot-out pattern 2615 is assisted (auxiliary display).

Specifically, the back portion of the shot-out pattern 2615 (at least a part of the back portion of the shot-out pattern 2615 may be covered, and includes an area other than the back portion of the shot-out pattern 2615) so that the light gradually advances in the direction away from the vicinity of the plurality of LEDs 2660. After gradually displaying the image on (which may be the one) to complete the image overlapping with the shot-out pattern 2615, by eliminating this image, the arrows of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 are the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a). ~ 4th pattern 2614d) is shot through the center, and as a result, the movement is such that the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d spread outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610. It is designed to produce an effect that the light emission effect, such as an animation with a certain character, has stopped.

Further, the shot-out pattern 2615 includes a portion displayed in the upper layer and a portion displayed in the lower layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). Specifically, on the surface side of the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) on the front side of the part of the shot-out pattern 2615 that is stuck in the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). The part indicating that there is (the right part of the shot-out pattern 2615 that is divided into left and right) is displayed on the upper layer with respect to the picture 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d), and the shot-out pattern is displayed. Of the 2615, the part (displayed divided into left and right) indicating that it is on the back side of the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) stuck in the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). The left side portion of the shot-out pattern 2615 is displayed in a lower layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). As a result, a perspective can be expressed based on the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d), and the arrows of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 are the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). It is possible to realistically express how it shoots through the center of.

Further, as described above, a condensing member 2670 is provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660 that emit the emission pattern 2615, and the light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 in a state where the light is condensed to increase the intensity of the light. Let me. On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are not provided with the light condensing member 2670, and these lights are diffused and enter the light guide plate main body 2611. Therefore, the shot-out pattern 2615 can be made to emit light with a stronger light than the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) emitted by the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the table light guide plate decorative substrate 2640. However, the light of the shot-out pattern 2615 gradually weakens as the distance from the plurality of LEDs 2660 increases (the reflection recess 2616 of the light guide plate main body 2611 is incident from the plurality of LEDs 2660 as the distance from the plurality of LEDs 2660 increases. By gradually reducing the ratio of reflecting light forward, the light that can be seen from the front of the light guide plate main body 2611 is gradually weakened), and the light emission of the shot-out pattern 2615 also expresses a sense of perspective.

Further, in the case of a big hit as a result of the variable display, the light guide plate main body 2611 is made to emit a light emitting pattern 2615, and the mode in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the left column. The decorative symbol in the middle row, which is temporarily stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the decorative symbol in the right column ("6" in this example), is cracked (destroyed) and becomes the same symbol as the decorative symbol in the left and right columns. The jackpot symbol is changed and the jackpot symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed (FIG. 153 (F)). On the other hand, if the variable display results in a loss, the light guide plate main body 2611 is made to emit a light emitting pattern 2615, and the appearance in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the left column. The decorative symbols in the left and right columns are the same as the decorative symbols in the left and right columns without breaking (without being destroyed). Is maintained with a different symbol and the lost symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed (FIG. 153 (E)).

It should be noted that not only when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed, but also when the reach effect is developed into a super reach effect, for example, in FIG. 152 (D), a symbol different from the decorative symbols in the left and right columns is temporarily stopped and displayed. The above-mentioned effect can also be executed when the decorative pattern in the middle row is destroyed and then developed into a super reach effect. In addition, when the above-mentioned effect is executed as the reach effect, the shot-out pattern 2615 is made to emit light when it becomes a big hit or when the reach effect is developed into a super reach effect, and when it is lost or the reach effect is super reach effect. In the case of deriving a lost pattern without developing the pattern, the front light guide plate 2610 is arranged in the order of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d without causing the shot-out pattern 2615 to emit light. After stopping the light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that spreads from the center to the outside, the lost symbol may be fixedly stopped and displayed. Further, there is a movement in which the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d spread outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 in this order without causing the shot-out pattern 2615 to emit light. After stopping the light emission effect such as animation, the shot-out pattern 2615 may be made to emit light to derive the jackpot pattern, or a reverse effect that develops the reach effect into a super reach effect or the like may be executed.

As described above, in the light emitting display of the light guide plate of the modified example, a plurality of patterns 2614 (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) and a shooting pattern 2615 are displayed on the front light guide plate 2610. Since the pattern is made to emit light on the same light guide plate (front light guide plate 2610), the perspective can be realistically expressed, so that the player can be surprised or surprised, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at a retracted position raised near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a. In addition, a pair of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are provided on each of the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. They are located in the first position where they overlap each other in the front and back. Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the front side on the right side. For this reason, the central decorative body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are visible on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, respectively. The center decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a decorate the inside of the game area 5a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In a normal state, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a located at the first position overlap each other in the front-rear direction. Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (player side), it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the rear side. It can be recognized that the number of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is only the number currently visible. When the LEDs mounted on the upper front center decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate are made to emit light in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second Since the two protruding decorative portions 3353a can be light-emitting decorated, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be used to decorate the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3352a. The portion 3353a can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Further, in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are in the retracted position near the upper edge of the front view game area 5a, so that the front view game The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351, and is in good condition from the player side. The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can entertain the effect image.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the lower appearance position. Then, the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 descend together. At this time, on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353, and on the right side of the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the remaining first protruding decorative body 3352. The lower ends of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are attached to each of them, and the upper ends of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable within a predetermined range. Since it is attached to the tip of the first link rod 3303 so that it can slide in the same vertical direction as the movement direction of the central decorative body 3351, it is attached to the unit base 3301 respectively, so that it descends together with the central decorative body 3351. The two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 (first protruding decorative portion 3352a and second protruding decorative portion 3353a) cause the left and right second link rods 3304 to move in the same direction as the central decorative body 3351, respectively. It is pulled downward and the upper end of the second link rod 3304 slides downward with respect to the unit base 3301. Since the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 can be slid in the vertical direction by the first link rod 3303 within a range shorter than the moving distance (elevation distance) of the central decorative body 3351, the central decorative body Before the 3351 reaches the appearance position of the descending end, the upper end portions of the left and right second link rods 3304 each reach the lower end portion in the sliding direction. Then, after the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 further moves in the direction of the lower appearance position, the lower end of the second link rod 3304 is further displayed. On the right side of the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decoration 3353 that try to descend together with the central decoration 3351 by the left and right second link rods 3304 because they cannot move in the direction (downward) of The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side are pulled toward the upper unit base 3301, and this force causes the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 to be center-decorated. The first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b attached to the rear side of the body 3351 rotate in different directions with respect to the axis extending back and forth around the center of the center decorative body 3351, and both left and right sides. The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the above move from the first position where the front and rear overlaps are eliminated to the second position where the front and rear overlap is eliminated. As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, which were visible as one on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, are rotated so as to spread the fan in two, and become the central decorative body 3351. The four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a extending radially around the central decorative body 3351 can form one large decoration and show it to the player. Therefore, since all the numbers of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 moved to the center of the game area 5a, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second By increasing the number of protruding decorative portions 3353a, the player can be surprised, and by expanding the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a around the central decorative body 3351, the entire decoration can be achieved. Can be increased, giving a strong impact to the player and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position of the rising end to the appearance position of the falling end by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 become the lower ends in the sliding direction. The two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 overlap each other until they reach (the end of the first link rod 3303 that rotates downward on the tip side). After the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the central decoration 3351 descends in the direction of the appearance position (downward). ), The two left and right first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a rotate from the first position where they overlap each other to the second position where the overlap is eliminated, and radiate around the central decorative body 3351. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect of moving in two stages by the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, the upper front drive motor 3302 By appropriately controlling, it is possible to stop the movement (effect) in the first stage or move (direct) to the second stage, and the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352. And the variation of the movable effect using the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be increased, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player can be less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, since the central decorative body 3351 can be moved from the retracted position of the rising end to the appearance position of the descending end by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the gaming state, the central decorative body 3351 can be moved from the retracted position of the ascending end to the appearance position of the descending end. When the game state changes, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3351 descends to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position side by the upper front drive motor 3302 and moved to the first stage where the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 do not rotate and move, the center Since the decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward in the normal state, it seems that there may be something good for the player. It can be made to have a sense of expectation for the game. Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the descending end to the second stage, that is, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a spread radially around the central decorative body 3351. The central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can show the player a large decoration, and the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be lowered to make the player feel as if a bulletin board from heaven is given to the player, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player think that the game will occur, raise the expectation for the game, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In this way, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movements of the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be changed in two steps. Therefore, the possibility (expected value) of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous differs between when the player stops in the first stage and when the player stops in the second stage. It is possible to suggest that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration can be recognized. Various expected values can be displayed to the player with the body 3353.

Further, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position to secure a space around the central decorative body 3351. For facilitation, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be moved from the first position to the second position and spread radially around the central decorative body 3351 at the appearance position. The body 3351 and the two first protruding ornaments 3352 and the second protruding ornament 3353 can form as large a decoration as possible. Therefore, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the game state, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protrusions radiating around the center decorative body 3351 near the center of the game area 5a. Since the large decoration by the decoration portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a can be shown to the player, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are in the first positions. Because one upper front drive motor 3302 moves the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protrusion decoration bodies 3352 and the second protrusion decoration body 3353 by one upper front drive motor 3302. When performing an effect (movable effect) using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353, it is sufficient to control only one upper front drive motor 3302, which is suitable for the effect. Such a load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing the effect using the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, the effect using other movable decorative bodies, luminescent decorative bodies, and the like is performed at the same time. However, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the load applied to the control of the effect, the control of the effect becomes unstable due to the overload, and the upper front drive motor 3302 causes the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352. And the movement of the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be prevented from being jerky, and the effect of using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be surely exhibited. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, as described above, while the central decorative body 3351 is descending to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since it is moved, the speed at which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move (rotate) to the second position becomes relatively faster than the moving speed of the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be made to move as if they suddenly spread around the central decorative body 3351, which surprises the player and surprises the player with the central decorative body 3351 and the second second. It is possible to enjoy the production using the one protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353.

Further, as described above, after the central decorative body 3351 has moved from the retracted position to the appearance position to some extent, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are first moved. I am trying to move from the position to the second position. That is, after moving the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a from the vicinity of the upper edge of the front view game area 5a to the center side to some extent, the first protruding decorative portion 3351 is radially spread around the central decorative body 3351. Since it is moved from the position to the second position, when the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move to the second position, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration The portion 3353a can be made difficult to come into contact with other members, and damage to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, and other members can be prevented.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front center decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate are made to emit light, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be independently luminescently decorated, the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3353a are provided with the luminescent decoration of the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, before the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protrusion decoration bodies 3352 and the second protrusion decoration body 3353 are lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper front center decoration substrate and the first protrusion decoration A player can illuminate the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on both the left and right sides by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the partial decorative substrate and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate. Because the central decorative body 3351 and the like can be focused on, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3351 and the like are moved to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, and the player can be enjoyed. You can evacuate. Then, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position on the central side of the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are radially formed around the central decorative body 3351. When it spreads to, it can surprise the player and make him think that there is something good, and can raise the player's expectation for the game. When the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the first by the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate (Ii) When the protruding decoration portion 3353a is light-emittingly decorated, the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area 5a can be shown to the player, so that the player is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game"). ”) Can be thought to occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the central appearance position in the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, the center Since (a part of) the effect image is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353, it is possible to make the player notice the descent of the central decorative body 3351 and the like and pay attention to it. It is possible to show the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a that move from the first position to the second position and radiate around the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, in the center of the gaming area 5a, a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be surely shown to the player, and the above-described effects can be obtained. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that surely plays.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the game ball B is located in the area excluding the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can play games that are distributed. A front effect unit 2600 provided with a transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame, and the effect is arranged rearward through the front light guide plate 2610. You can enjoy the effect image displayed on the display device 1600. In this state, the predetermined LED2630 of the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the upper peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 via the reflector 2620 according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a. When (any of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d) is made to emit light, the identification on the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610 corresponding to the LED 2630 is specified. Light is irradiated to the light input unit 2612 (any of the first specific light input unit 2612a, the second specific light input unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d), and the specific light input unit 2612d is irradiated with light. The corresponding pattern 2614 (any of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d) is emitted and displayed by the light incident on the front light guide plate 2610 from the light unit 2612. The Rukoto. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, and from a plurality of through holes 2622 penetrating the fixed recess 2621 to the specific light input portion 2612 side. Since a plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 via the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 so as to face each other, the LEDs 2630 can be brought as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light incident unit 2612) of the light guide plate main body 2611. It is possible to reliably irradiate the corresponding specific light input unit 2612 with the light from the LED 2630, and it is possible to prevent the light from the LED 2630 from diffusing through the through hole 2622. It is possible to prevent the portion 2612 from being irradiated with light.

Then, the light incident on the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light input portion 2612 corresponds to the reflection recess 2613 (first reflection recess 2613a, second reflection recess 2613b, third reflection recess 2613c, fourth reflection recess 2613d). ,), The light irradiated in the reflection recess 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflection recess 2613 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612, the light reflected or refracted by the reflection recess 2613 is projected in a predetermined direction. Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 is included, the light guide plate main body 2611 is seen by the reflective recess 2613 in the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a (light guide plate main body 2611). The light reflected or refracted in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the surface reaches, the reflection recess 2613 appears to shine, and the pattern 2614 composed of the reflection recess 2613 appears to be emitted and displayed. On the other hand, the light incident on the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light input unit 2612 also reaches the reflection recess 2613 that does not correspond to the specific light input unit 2612, but the reflection recess 2613 that does not correspond to the specific light input unit 2612. Since the light extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the specific light input portion 2612 in which the light is incident, the direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflection recess 2613 is directed to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It is tilted with respect to the vertical direction and does not reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and the uncorresponding reflective recess 2613 does not appear to shine. In this way, when the specific light input unit 2612 is irradiated with light by the LED 2630, only the reflection recess 2613 corresponding to the specific light input unit 2612 reflects or refracts the light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. Then, it reaches the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and it is possible to show the player that only the pattern 2614 composed of the corresponding reflective recesses 2613 is displayed by light emission. ..

Therefore, by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 to emit light and changing the specific light input unit 2612 to be irradiated with light, the pattern 2614 emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 can be variously changed. By displaying the 2614 in light, it is possible to surprise and entertain the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed so as to be sequentially related to each other, a plurality of LEDs 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group) are formed according to the gaming state. When the 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d) are sequentially emitted, a plurality of patterns (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) are sequentially emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 for animation. It is possible to show the player a moving light emitting display like this.

Specifically, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are displayed in the order of light emission, and after the last fourth pattern 2614d, the first pattern 2614a returns to the beginning again. When the light emission display is repeated in order from the beginning, the player can be shown the light emission display that keeps moving from the outside toward the center by the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give the person the illusion that the momentum is concentrated, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the person think that there is something good. On the other hand, contrary to the above, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second pattern 2614b, and the first pattern 2614a are displayed in the order of light emission, and after the last first pattern 2614a, the first pattern 2614a is returned to the beginning and the second pattern is displayed again. When the light emission display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the player can be shown the light emission display that keeps moving from the center to the outside by the plurality of pictures of the light guide plate. It is possible to make the person have the illusion that it spreads from the center or that it is moving forward, and it is possible to make the player feel that the gaming state will change. In this way, since it is possible to show the player a moving light emitting display like an animation, the moving light emitting display by the front light guide plate 2610, which has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far, is strong against the player. It can give an impact, can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is emitted by the LED 2630, it emits light. The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making the game difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is attached by two members as in the conventional case. It is possible to eliminate the rattling between the two LEDs and the light guide plate 2610, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at a desired position with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light input unit 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light input unit 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be emitted. It is possible to reliably display light emission.

Further, since the pattern 2614 is composed of a plurality of reflection recesses 2613 extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the specific light input unit 2612, the plurality of specific light input units 2612 are formed on the light guide plate main body 2611. It can be arranged on a specific side (here, the upper side) on the peripheral edge, and by arranging a plurality of specific light receiving portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) is guided. It can be arranged only on the upper side of the light plate main body 2611. As a result, the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611 without the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 being surrounded by the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear from being partitioned, so that the effect image and the like can be easily seen from the player side, and the player can see the effect image. It is possible to entertain the production image in a good state and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a feeling of openness because there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in the front view. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 have an appealing power that enhances the appearance in the game area 5a and strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, as described above, since a single front light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of (four in this case) patterns 2614 by light emission, it is not necessary to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the conventional case, and a plurality of light guide plates are used. Since the dimension in the front-rear direction related to the light emission display of the picture 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible and the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be moved to the player side. The position can be set as close as possible, and it is possible to easily secure a wide space behind the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the effect of the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing movable effects with the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. be able to.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be matched by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. And a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 does not exist and surprise him, and to entertain the light emission display of multiple patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and suppress the deterioration of interest. can.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from the player side, it is possible to prevent the reflector 2620 and the like from being visible and the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By displaying the picture 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 by light emission, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not anticipate, and the light emission display of the picture 2614 can be enjoyed and the game can be enjoyed. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by the production by the above, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 By displaying the effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2614 emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the emitted patterns 2614. , It is possible to show the player a production (display production) that can strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a has a left slider 3212 that moves in the vertical direction and an upper rear left decorative body 3220 in which decorations are formed on the right slider 3232. An upper rear left decorative substrate and an upper rear right decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for illuminating the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the upper rear left decorative body 3220, and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are mounted are attached. Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and the force for moving the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward due to gravity acts greatly. In this state, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is transported or the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrates in the pachinko machine 1. When a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 further acts, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, and the left slider 3212. Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240), the clutch mechanism 3250 is caused by the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the above is about to rotate, the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is moved between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. In the bitten state, a force for rotating the housing case 3251 acts on the plurality of rollers 3254. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the accommodating case is interposed via the plurality of rollers 3254. The frictional resistance generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force for rotating the 3251, so that the accommodating case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, output is performed according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending arbitrarily. Therefore, since the clutch mechanism 3250 can lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are arbitrary during transportation or installation. By moving to, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end and damaging the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232 and other members. In addition, the movable effect of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be surely enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped at the manufacturing factory, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are shipped in the state of the origin position, the upper rear left by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving without permission, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 when installed in the island facility of the game hall. It is not necessary to perform the above, the labor required for installing the pachinko machine 1 can be saved, and the burden on the installation can be reduced.

Further, when installing or maintaining the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from the regular positions (origin position) for some reason. In this case, when the operator manually moves the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the proper positions, the clutch mechanism 3250 uses a tightening spring as a torque limiter on the outer peripheral side of the accommodating case 3251. By tightening with 3255, the rotation on the output side is locked according to the load of rotation so that the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move. An even stronger force is applied (acting) on the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 in an attempt to move the 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to rotate the storage case 3251 via a plurality of rollers 3254. When the force is greater than the frictional resistance generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, slippage occurs between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 against the frictional resistance. The storage case 3251 will rotate, and the output member 3253 will rotate together with the storage case 3251 to release the lock, and the rotation of the output member 3253 will be performed via the input member 3252 on the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and. Since it is transmitted to the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side, a strong force acting on the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220, the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the clutch mechanism 3250, and the like from being damaged.

Further, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear left unit 3210 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area 5a. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, its rotation is transmitted via the clutch mechanism 3250, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 are in the front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, which move downward from the upper part of the inside and are attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, are lowered respectively, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 The lowering (appearance) of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can surprise the player, and the player is made to pay attention to the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear It is possible to entertain the movement and decoration of the right decorative body 3240, and it seems that there is something good for the player by lowering the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right decorative body 3240), respectively. Therefore, vibration from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, left slider 3212 and right slider 3232, upper rear left decorative body 3220, upper rear right decorative body 3240, and upper part. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253 The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the above, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. A force to rotate it will act. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the accommodating case is interposed via the plurality of rollers 3254. The frictional resistance generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force for rotating the 3251, so that the accommodating case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, output is performed according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending arbitrarily, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from making unexpected movements (falling), and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 make unintended movements, which makes the player feel distrustful. It is possible to prevent the player from giving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to enjoy the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3240 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of production patterns that stop ascending and descending at the position, making it difficult for the player to get bored with the movable production of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is provided. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being damaged at an early stage due to overload, and the upper part can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, prevent the player from being uncomfortable, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protruding portions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are each connected by the lock spring 3260. When the protrusions 3252a, which are close to each other, are urged, the rollers 3254 are immediately applied when a force for rotating the output member 3253 is applied from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is released after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 up to this point can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple configuration using an accommodation case 3251, an input member 3252, an output member 3253, a plurality of rollers 3254, and the like, it is provided with two planetary gear mechanisms as the clutch mechanism. By reducing the size of the clutch mechanism 3250, the space for arranging the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or other members) can be increased in comparison with the above. It is possible to make it easier to secure, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be relatively enlarged and conspicuous, and the large upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be used. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by strongly attracting the interest of the player.

Further, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 having the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are provided, respectively, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 are provided according to the gaming state. By appropriately raising and lowering the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, respectively, the two upper rear left decorative bodies 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 play a movable effect of various patterns. It is possible to show it to a person, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decline in the interest in the game. At this time, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 each have a clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, respectively. Since the clutch moves smoothly, it is possible to entertain the player with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, respectively, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, when the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the game state, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper portion are moved downward. By bringing the rear right decorative bodies 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body. By doing so, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player due to the appearance of a large decorative body (for example, " It is possible to make people think that a big hit game) will occur, raise expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and united, they try to move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side by contacting each other. However, since each of them has a clutch mechanism 3250, a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (from the output side). Even if a force (force to rotate) is applied, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to the contact between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 due to the reaction of the contact. It is also possible to prevent the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning, and the player is surely entertained with the movable effect that the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and united to reduce the interest. It can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to illuminate the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board according to the game state. Therefore, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and the decoration and movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated with light emission to make the player think that there is something good for the game. It is possible to raise the expectation for the LED and suppress the decline in interest. Further, by providing the upper rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the weight related to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increases, and the gravity and inertial force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increase. Further, as described above, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. The upper rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, which can be light-emittingly decorated, from unintentionally moving, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving unintentionally. It is possible to make the upper rear right decorative body 3240 perform a desired movement with a high effect, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, since the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255 and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodating case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodating recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256, the output member is output from the output side. The 3253 is rotated and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 to engage the roller 3254 between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 acts via a plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. If it is larger than, slippage occurs between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the accommodating case 3251 rotates. Then, as the accommodating case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated with a strong force from the output side, slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the accommodation case 3251 and the accommodation case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 cannot be strongly bitten and unlocked, or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration. It is possible to prevent the body 3240, the output member 3253, and the storage case 3251 from being damaged, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that surely achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, in the front view game area 5a, the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side on the left and right sides of the lower center elevating base 3121 and the lower center elevating base 3121. After lowering the elevating base 3171 respectively, the left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body are provided by sliders and the like (slide mechanism) attached to the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 respectively. The 3173 is slid outward in the left-right direction, and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a is retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 can be seen in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the lower front center decoration 3111 (lower rear center decoration) is located in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The four rotating decorations 3126 arranged in the left-right direction of the body 3122) and the central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part thereof can be seen, and the four rotating decorations 3126 are separated from the left and right ends of the row to the outside in the left-right direction. The left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3173 and the left sub side rotating decoration body 3155 and the right sub side rotating decoration body 3175 can be seen above the left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3173 of the lower left side effect unit 3150 and the lower right side effect unit 3170, respectively. Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a, an annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring can be seen as an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. ing.

In this state, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a (the first special lottery result or the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). (Ii) (depending on the result of the special lottery), the four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central ornament 3111 rotate, or the four rotating ornaments arranged side by side by the lower center elevating base 3121. The 3126 rises together with the lower rear center decoration 3122, the four rotating decorations 3126 raised by the lower center elevating base 3121 rotate, and the lower left slide drive motor and lower right side of the lower left side effect unit 3150. A pair of left side rotation decorations 3153 and right side rotation decorations 3173 slide in the left-right direction by a lower right slide drive motor or the like (slide mechanism) of the production unit 3170, or left side rotation decorations 3153 or right side rotation decorations 3173. The four rotating ornaments 3126 and the left where the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173 are raised by the slide mechanism and the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171. It is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are lined up in the left-right direction, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotate. Therefore, the player is made to pay attention to the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorative bodies 3126), the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the movable production by them.

Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the descending end, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 is made to emit light and the lower front central decorative body 3111 is made to emit light, so that a downward arrow is emitted and the lower center elevating is displayed. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear center decoration 3122 and the lower front center decoration 3111 to emit light by a plurality of LEDs on the lower center decoration substrate, a large downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light, or a pair of lower left side elevating and lowering. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to make the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. The effect can also entertain the player, and the downward arrow displayed by the light emitting can guide the player's line of sight to the lower effect operation unit 301, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301. Can be encouraged. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or presses the pressing operation unit 303, thereby participating in the player participation type production. Can be entertained.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emitting effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to present various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected production. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, four rotating ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and a right side rotating ornament 3173, and a pair of left subside rotating ornaments 3155 and a right subside rotating ornament 3175 are extended in the left-right direction, respectively. It is designed to rotate independently around the axis, and has four decorative parts 3127, 3154, and 3156, which are different from each other in the circumferential direction. Therefore, when they are rotated, the player side is affected. The facing surfaces (decorative portion 3127, decorative portion 3154, decorative portion 3156) can be changed, and the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a can be variously changed to entertain the player. Further, when the four rotating ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the pair of left subside rotating ornaments 3155 and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 are stopped rotating, By stopping the rotation of each of the decorative parts 3127, the decorative part 3154, and the decorative part 3156 facing the player side so as to be a predetermined combination, various messages can be displayed to the player as decorations. Since it can be presented, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous may occur depending on the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156 that have stopped rotating. By representing (expected value), each of the four rotating ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the pair of left subside rotating ornaments are represented according to the gaming state. When the 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are rotated, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156, which have higher expectations, stops rotating. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the lower rear center decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in a row in the vertical direction and each of which can independently emit light, if the plurality of light emitting regions 3122a are simultaneously emitted, one light emitting region 3122a is provided. A downward arrow can be displayed to emit light, and if a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a are repeatedly emitted from the top, the player's line of sight is directed to the lower effect operation unit 301 by the light emission flowing from the top to the bottom. It can be easily guided, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be further promoted, so that the player can surely operate the effect operation unit 301.

Further, since the effect operation unit 301 has an annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed by the player. Since the pressing operation of the or pressing operation unit 303 can be performed, the pattern of the player participation type production can be diversified by appropriately combining the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is surrounded by the rotation operation unit 302, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 should be increased. The large rotation operation unit 302 can strongly attract the player's attention. Therefore, as described above, when the player's line of sight is guided downward by the light emitting display of the downward arrow by the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the rotation operation unit 302 (pressing operation unit 303). ) Can be easily noticed, so that the player can be strongly urged to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and enjoy the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302, as described above, the downward arrow emission display by the lower rear central decoration body 3122 and the lower front center decoration body 3111 is displayed. When the player looks below the arrow, the rotating rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen, so that the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 may cause an advantageous gaming state for the player. At the same time, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be strongly urged, the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably pressed, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the person.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 can be in a state of being lowered and a state of protruding upward, the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen to be large and conspicuous when the pressing operation unit 303 is in a protruding state. It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur. On the other hand, since the pressing operation unit 303 is less noticeable when the pressing operation unit 303 is lowered, it is possible to make the player think that the possibility of an advantageous gaming state is low, and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to think. Depending on the advancing / retreating position of, the player can be made to suggest the possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state may occur.

Further, since the possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state occurs for the player can be suggested by the advancing / retreating position of the pressing operation unit 303, as described above, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front When the downward arrow is emitted by the central decorative body 3111 or the like, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, which raises the player's expectation and the pressing operation. The pressing operation of the unit 303 can be enjoyed, the player is less likely to get bored, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image in the center of the front view game area 5a is provided, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is used. It is also possible to entertain the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a behind the lower movable effect unit 3100, the lower center elevating base 3121 is used together with the lower rear center decorative body 3122 according to the game state. The four rotating ornaments 3126 can be raised, or the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament can be raised together with the lower left side ornament 3152 and the lower right side ornament 3172 by the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171. When the body 3173 is raised, a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the like. Since it is possible to make the player notice the rise of the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the right side rotating decoration 3173, etc., it is possible to surely show the player the effect using them. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect image can be displayed in the center of the front view game area 5a, as described above, the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear center decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side. When the decorative body 3172 or the like emits a downward arrow to urge the player to operate the lower effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 is provided with an effect image prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301 or an effect operation unit. By displaying an effect image explaining the operation of the 301, an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous and the effect operation unit 301, and the like, the effect operation unit 301 is displayed to the player. It is possible to strongly encourage participation in the player-participation-type production that operates the player, and it is possible to make the production operation unit 301 easier to operate, so that the player-participation-type production can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. ..

Further, as described above, since various combinations of effects can be shown to the player, for example, the lower center elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are usually lowered. From the state, when the left and right left side rotation decorations 3153 and the right side rotation decorations 3173 are moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the slide mechanism such as the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right slide drive motor, they are lined up side by side. The left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173 are located on the left and right sides of the row of the two rotating decorations 3126, and the four rotating decorations 3126 and the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decoration are located. Since the body 3173 and the body 3173 are arranged side by side, the player can be surprised and the player can be entertained. In this state, the lower center elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 raise the four rotating decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153, and the right side rotating decoration 3173. , Four rotating ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and a right side rotating ornament 3173, and a pair of left subside rotating ornaments 3155 and a right subside rotating ornament 3175 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. Since it is possible to show the player a large horizontal decoration that crosses the game area 5a, it can have a strong impact on the player, and I think there is something good about it. It is possible to raise expectations for the game. Then, the four rotating decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173, and the pair of left subside rotating decorations 3155 and the right subside rotating decorations 3175 are left and right in an appropriate combination. In the state of being lined up, when the rotation is stopped after rotating them, the player is thrilled depending on whether or not the combination of the decorative part 3127, the decorative part 3154, and the decorative part 3156 stops rotating in the desired combination. It is possible to enjoy the rotation (movable effect) of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 and the like, and when each decorative portion 3127 and the like are stopped rotating in a desired combination, the gaming state is advantageous to the player. It is possible to be convinced of the occurrence of, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in interest. After that, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 (lower front center decorative body 3111), the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit a downward arrow to display the downward arrow, thereby displaying the player's line of sight downward. It can be guided to the unit 301, and the player can be urged to operate the effect operation unit 301. At this time, since it is possible to suggest the possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state may occur depending on the size of the downward arrow displayed by light emission, if the arrow displayed by light emission is small, it continues to the player. It is possible to make people think that it can be recovered by operating the effect operation unit 301, and if the arrow displayed by the light emission is small, it is possible to be sure that an advantageous gaming state has occurred. It is possible to entertain the subsequent operation of the production operation unit 301 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, as a movable effect unit, a rotating decorative body 3126 which is rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right and has a plurality of (four) decorative portions 3127 which are different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed in the left-right direction. Although four are provided coaxially with each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rotating decorative body in which a plurality of decorative parts that are rotatable around an axis extending vertically and are different from each other in the circumferential direction are formed. It may be provided with at least one, at least one rotating decorative body that can rotate around an axis extending back and forth, at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction, and the like. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 which move up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is limited thereto. A clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between a movable decorative body that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decorative body that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a drive motor.

Further, in the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes a housing case 3251, an input member 3252, an output member 3253, and a roller 3254, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation from the drive motor. A deceleration unit that temporarily decelerates the speed and a speed conversion unit that shifts the decelerated rotation and transmits the decelerated rotation to the output side. It is composed of a first planetary gear mechanism having an impossible fixed ring gear, a second solar gear connected to the first sun gear, a second planetary gear, and a second planetary gear mechanism having a rotatable rotary ring gear. , A carrier having support shafts for supporting each is arranged between the first planet gear mechanism and the second planet gear mechanism, and a ring is provided between the first planet gear mechanism and the second planet gear mechanism. A difference in the number of teeth may be provided between at least one gear of the gear and the sun gear so that the rotation from the drive motor is decelerated and transmitted to the rotary ring gear.

[14. Stock time production]
Hereinafter, the stock time effect implemented in the present embodiment will be described.
[14-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described. FIG. 154 is a table showing an example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also referred to as special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as special figure 2. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively called a special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are collectively referred to as a special symbol variation or simply a variation. The special lottery results in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 include big hits and small hits. The jackpot of the special figure 1 includes "2R time saving symbol 1" and "6R time saving symbol 1".

Further, the small hit in the special figure 1 includes "7R time saving symbol 1" and "7R time saving symbol 2". The details will be described later, but during the small hit game won by the first special symbol lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and when the so-called right-handed hit is made and the game ball B is hit into the first big winning opening 2005, In the small hit game, the game ball B enters a specific area in the first large winning opening 2005 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). That is, winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is substantially equivalent to having a chance of winning a big hit with a short time with a probability of 1/3.

When the game ball B enters the specific area and the small hit is completed, the 6-round big hit game (types are "7R time-saving symbol 1" and "7R time-saving symbol 2", but the small hit is in progress. Since the opening of the first big winning opening 2005 is counted as one round, the big hit game is 6 rounds), and when the big hit game is finished, the time saving state starts. If the game ball B does not enter the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is not started and the time reduction is not given.

In the example of FIG. 154, the jackpot probability of "6R time-saving symbol 1" in the first special symbol lottery is extremely low (205/65536 × 4/200). In addition, the jackpot winning rate (600/65536 x 1/3) via the small hit in the first special symbol lottery is much higher than the jackpot probability of "6R time-saving symbol 1", and the time is shortened for all the jackpots via the small hit. The state is given.

Further, during the non-time saving state, the game ball B does not enter the second starting port 2004 or enters the ball only with an extremely low probability, so that the second special symbol lottery is not executed in principle. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 154, most of the triggers for entering the time-saving state from the non-time-saving state (excluding the predetermined number of second special symbol fluctuations immediately after the end of the time-saving state. Details will be described later) are based on the first special symbol lottery. It is a big hit via a small hit.

The jackpot of special figure 2 includes "4R time saving symbol 1" and "15R time saving symbol 1". Further, the small hit in the special figure 2 includes "5R time-saving symbol 1", "16R time-saving symbol 1", and "16R time-saving symbol 2". The details will be described later, but during the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and when the so-called right-handed hit is made and the game ball B is hit into the first big winning opening 2005, In the small hit game, the game ball B enters a specific area in the first big winning opening 2005 with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1).

When the game ball B enters the specific area and the small hit is completed, if the type of the small hit is "5R time saving symbol 1", the big hit game of 4 rounds is performed, and the type of the small hit is In the case of "16R time-saving symbol 1" or "16R time-saving symbol 2", a 15-round jackpot game starts, and when the jackpot game ends, the time-saving state starts. That is, winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is substantially equivalent to winning a big hit with a short time. If the game ball B does not enter the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is not started and the time reduction is not given.

In this chapter, the trigger for the end of the time saving state is the end of the fourth special symbol change after the time saving state starts, and the eighth special symbol change after the time saving state starts (that is, the first special symbol). The total number of fluctuations of the fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8), or the jackpot game starts, which is the earliest. It goes without saying that even if the time saving state ends due to the start of the big hit game, if the big hit is a big hit with a time saving, the new time saving state will be entered again after the big hit game ends.

Although the details will be described later, by inserting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 during the fourth second special symbol change during the time saving state, a maximum of four fourths can be reached before the change is completed. (Ii) Special symbol changes can be withheld. That is, it is possible to execute the second special symbol change up to eight times after entering the time saving state. According to the jackpot probability in the example of FIG. 154, the probability of winning a jackpot or a small hit in the four second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is about 54.9%, but during the time saving state and the time saving state. The probability of winning a big hit or a small hit in a total of eight second special symbol lottery held after the end increases to about 79.7%.

That is, the fluctuation time during the second special symbol fluctuation of the fourth time during the time reduction (the last fluctuation of the time reduction) is long enough to allow the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004 (concrete fluctuation). By doing so (the time will be described later), the second special symbol change is executed in the 5th to 8th non-time saving states, so that the ball output rate should be increased without increasing the so-called pullback probability during the time saving state. Can be done.

In addition, the condition that "the eighth special symbol change (that is, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change is eight times)" is set when the time saving state ends. Is included for the following reasons. Although not shown, during the time reduction, even if the jackpot of "2R time reduction no symbol 1" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time reduction is given after the jackpot game is completed.

If the condition is not included in the end trigger of the time saving state, the second special symbol change is executed only three times during the time saving, and if the big hit or the small hit is not won, the second special symbol change. Rather than executing 5 more times, if the first special symbol change is continuously executed, the ball output rate will increase. Therefore, in order to prevent such a capture, the condition is included in the end trigger of the time saving state.

In addition, the reason why the number of times of "8 times" is adopted in the said condition (the total number of times of change of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change is 8 times) is as follows. In order to prevent the above-mentioned capture, the number of times must be set as small as possible.

On the other hand, assuming that the number of times is 7 times, for example, when the condition that the time reduction is given is satisfied in the state where 4 hold of the first special symbol change is accumulated in the normal time of the non-time reduction state, the game is played. The person may be satisfied with the time saving and may stop the game, such as taking a restroom break or reporting to a friend. When the game is stopped and the time saving state is started in this way, the four hold of the first special symbol change is exhausted, so that the second special symbol change can be executed only up to three times in the time saving state. However, it will be disadvantageous for the player. Further, if the player is afraid of the occurrence of such a situation and plays the game so as not to suspend the first special symbol change, the progress of the game may be delayed. Similarly, when the number of times is 6 or less, a situation may occur in which the second special symbol change can be executed only 3 times or less depending on the number of pending first special symbol changes at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is desirable that the number of times under the condition is eight.

As mentioned above, the condition (the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8 times) is included in the end trigger of the time saving state in order to prevent the above-mentioned capture. .. In addition, if the condition is not included in the end condition of the time saving state, such a capture becomes possible only during the time saving state in the first special symbol lottery, "2R time saving no symbol 1". Even if the jackpot is won, the time saving state is given after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, even if the big hit of "2R time saving no symbol 1" is won in the time saving state, if the time saving is not given after the big hit game is finished, such a capture cannot be performed in the first place. The condition may not be included in the end trigger of the time saving state.

FIG. 155 is a table showing an example of a pattern of opening time and closing time of the big winning opening selected in each round of the big hit game or the small hit game. Patterns A and B are patterns of opening time and closing time of the second big winning opening 2006 in which the opening / closing operation is performed during the big hit game, and both are patterns in which the operation of closing after opening for a long time is executed once. ..

Pattern C is a pattern of opening time and closing time of the first big winning opening 2005 in which opening and closing operations are performed during the small hit game won in the first special symbol lottery, and the operation of closing after a short time opening is performed a plurality of times. The pattern to execute. During the small hit game, the game ball B that has entered the first major winning opening 2005 reaches a distribution member (role) that enters a specific area with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). The route through which the game ball B passes through the distribution member is also referred to as an accessory route.

Pattern D is a pattern of opening time and closing time of the first big winning opening 2005 in which the opening / closing operation is performed during the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, and the operation of closing after a short time opening is performed a plurality of times. The pattern to execute. Since the game ball B that has entered the first major winning opening 2005 enters a specific area with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1) without reaching the above-mentioned distribution member, the game ball B is the distribution. A route that enters a specific area without passing through a member is also called a direct V route.

In each pattern, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B enter the opening large winning opening during the opening time, the pattern is displayed even if the opening time has not ended. Transition to the indicated closure period. Specifically, for example, in pattern A, when 10 game balls B enter the second major winning opening 2006 before 29.000 seconds have passed since the second major winning opening 2006 was opened. , The closing period of 2.000 seconds begins and the round ends at the end of the closing period.

FIG. 156 (A) is a table showing an example of the time of the hit start effect (also referred to as the opening effect), and (B) is a table showing an example of the time of the final hit effect (also referred to as the ending effect). The opening effect is an effect performed from the start of the big hit game or the small hit game to the start of the first round of the big hit game or the small hit game. The ending effect is an effect performed between the end of the final round of the big hit game or the small hit game and the end of the big hit game or the small hit game. In the example of FIG. 156, for each pattern, the opening effect time and the ending effect time are defined for each of the winning in the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state.

FIG. 157 is a table showing an example of the operation schedule of the big winning opening during the big hit game. In the table of FIG. 157, the opening effect time, the opening pattern of the big winning opening of each round, and the ending effect time are defined for each jackpot type.

In the start j column, the opening effect time is defined by the identifier shown in FIG. 156 (A). In the column indicating each round, the opening pattern in the round is defined by the identifier shown in FIG. 155. In addition, "below" in the column indicates that the second major winning opening 2006 will be opened during the opening time in the round. In the final y column, the time of the ending effect is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (B).

In addition, a big hit via a small hit (that is, "special figure 1_7R time saving symbol 1", "special figure 1_7R time saving symbol 2", "special figure 2_5R time saving symbol 1", "special figure 2_16R time saving symbol 1", And "Special Figure 2, 16R Time Saving Symbol 2"), the opening time of the first round is not defined because there is an opening of the big winning opening of one round during the small hit game, and this is one round. This is because it is treated as an eye. In the jackpot game, when the opening effect is completed, the game shifts to the second round.

The pattern of the fifth round of "Special Figure 2_16R Time Saving Symbol 2" is B. Pattern B has a longer closing time of the winning opening than Pattern A selected in the other rounds (Pattern A is 2.000 seconds, Pattern B is 9.000 seconds). For example, at the end of the second special symbol change that won the "special figure 2_16R time saving symbol 2", the notification as if the "special figure 2_5R time saving symbol 1" was won is executed (for example, at the end of the change, "special figure 2_5R time saving symbol 1" is executed. The decorative symbol corresponding to "Fig. 2_5R time-saving symbol 1" is stopped by the effect display device 1600). You may perform a promotion effect to announce that there was.

As a result, even if the notification that the jackpot of 5 rounds is won is executed at the end of the fluctuation, the player can get a feeling of expectation that he has won the jackpot of 16 rounds. Further, for a player who is not aware of the promotion effect, the promotion effect can give a feeling of exhilaration at once.

FIG. 158 is a table showing an example of the operation schedule of the large winning opening during the small hit game. In the table of FIG. 158, the opening effect time, the opening pattern of the large winning opening of each round, and the ending effect time are defined for each small hit type. In the example of FIG. 158, all small hits are composed of an opening effect, one round, and an ending effect.

Similar to FIG. 157, in the start j column, the opening effect time is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (A). Further, in the column indicating each round, the opening pattern in the round is defined by the identifier shown in FIG. 155. In addition, "right" in the column indicates that the first prize opening 2005 will be opened during the opening time in the round. In the final y column, the time of the ending effect is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (B). The pattern of the small hit round won in the first special symbol lottery is C (role route), and the pattern of the small hit round won in the second special symbol lottery is D (straight V route).

[14-2. Small hit game]
Hereinafter, the small hit game executed in this chapter will be described. First, the operation of each part in the first big winning opening 2005 during the small hit game will be described. FIG. 159 is an enlarged front view showing an outline example of the configuration in the first prize opening 2005. The shape, size, etc. of each configuration in FIG. 159 may be exaggerated for convenience of explanation, and do not necessarily match other drawings. Further, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 159 does not show all the members provided in the first prize opening 2005 and around the first prize opening 2005.

In the first prize opening 2005, for example, a first structure 2061, a second structure 2062, a specific area 2063, a side wall portion 2064, a side wall portion 2065, and a distribution member 2070 are provided. The first structure 2061 is arranged, for example, directly below the first grand prize opening 2005 in the front view. The first structure 2061 is, for example, a sphere having a recess capable of holding only one game ball B. Even if the game ball B newly entered in the first prize opening 2005 collides with the game ball B already held in the recess, the game ball B is deep enough not to pop out from the recess. It is desirable that the depression has a dent.

Further, the first structure 2061 is a movable body in which the depression faces the direction of the second structure 2062 at the initial position. During its operation, the first structure 2061 rotates to the left in the front view with the center of the sphere as the center so that the depression faces in the front view upward direction.

Therefore, when the game ball B enters the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 is opened and the depression of the first structure 2061 is facing upward in the front view, the game ball B is released. Only one is held in the recess of the first structure 2061. Even if the game ball B is further held in the recess of the first structure 2061 and the game ball B enters the first prize opening 2005, the game ball B is held in the recess. It is discharged to the lower left region of the first structure 2061 without going to the specific region 2063. Similarly, even if the game ball B enters the first grand prize opening 2005 with the first structure 2061 in the initial position, the game ball B is not held in the recess and the first structure 2061 It is discharged to the lower left area and does not go to the specific area 2063.

Further, when only one game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061 and the first structure 2061 rotates to the right in the front view and returns to the initial position, the game ball B is second. Head to structure 2062. The second structure 2062 is a member that can be opened and closed. When the game ball B reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is open, the game ball B falls in the downward direction of the front view of the second structure 2062 and finally enters the specific area 2063. .. Further, when the game ball B reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is closed, the game ball B passes over the second structure 2062 and is in the lower right direction of the front view of the second structure 2062. To the distribution member 2070 arranged in.

The sorting member 2070 includes, for example, a bottom portion 2071, a front wall portion 2072, a front wall portion 2073, and a rotating portion 2074. The bottom portion 2071 is surrounded by both side wall portions 2064 and side wall portions 2065 at both ends in the left-right direction in the front view, and the shape thereof is, for example, a disk shape.

The front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073 are arranged on the left and right sides of the bottom portion 2071 on the front side of the front view. Further, for example, the first opening formed between the side wall portion 2064 and the front wall portion 2072, the second opening formed between the front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073, and the front wall portion 2073. The positions of the front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073 in the left-right direction in the front view are defined at positions where the sizes of the third openings formed between the side wall portion 2065 and the side wall portion 2065 are substantially the same.

The rotating portion 2074 has, for example, a rotating shaft portion and a ball portion attached to a side surface of the rotating shaft portion. The rotating portion 2074 repels the game ball B that collides with the ball portion by rotating at high speed about the rotating shaft portion.

The game ball B that has reached the distribution member 2070 collides with the front wall portion 2072, the front wall portion 2073, the side wall portion 2064, the side wall portion 2065, the ball portion of the rotating portion 2074, and the back wall of the game area 5a, and finally. Passes through a first opening, a second opening, or a third opening. The game ball B that has passed through the first opening enters the specific area 2063. The game ball B that has passed through the second opening and the third opening is discharged to the region below the distribution member 2070, and does not go to the specific region 2063.

The game balls B that have reached the distribution member 2070 are distributed so that the probabilities of reaching the first opening, the second opening, and the third opening are substantially the same (1/3). The position, shape, and size of each part in the member 2070, and the rotation speed and rotation direction of the rotating part 2074 are defined.

FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing the operation schedule of the movable body in the first big winning opening 2005 during the small hit game. The horizontal axis of the timing chart of FIG. 160 indicates the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game. Further, in the timing chart of FIG. 160, the ON and OFF states of the first prize opening 2005 indicate the open state and the closed state, respectively, and the ON and OFF states of the first structure 2061 are the post-operation states (first). Indicates a state in which the depression of the structure 2061 faces the front view upward direction) and an initial position state (a state in which the depression of the first structure 2061 faces the second structure 2062), and ON / OFF of the second structure 2062. The states indicate an open state and a closed state, respectively.

First, the operation schedule of the movable body in the small hit won in the first special symbol lottery will be described. In the small hits won in the first special symbol lottery, the first large winning opening 2005 is the schedule indicated by the "first large winning opening (character route)" in FIG. The schedule is the same as that shown in "Special Figure 1_7R Time Saving Symbol 1").

When the small hit game starts, the opening effect of 3000 ms is executed, and then the first big winning opening 2005 is opened according to the schedule shown by the pattern C in FIG. 155. During the period when the first prize opening 2005 is open (except for the first opening), the first structure 2061 is in the ON state. As a result, when the game ball B enters the first prize opening 2005 during the period, the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061.

The first structure 2061 is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed from the completion of the final opening of the first large winning opening 2005 in the small hit game. Further, the second structure 2062 is in the OFF state at the timing when the first structure 2061 is switched to the OFF state. As a result, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061 heads toward the distribution member 2070. Therefore, when the game ball B is entered into the first large winning opening 2005 during the small hit game, one game ball B is entered into the specific area 2063 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). be able to.

Since the closing period (19.364 seconds (pattern C1 in FIG. 155)) between the first opening and the second opening of the first prize opening 2005 is long, the first opening is also completed at the end of the first opening. One structure 2061 is temporarily turned off.

Next, the operation schedule of the movable body during the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery will be described. In the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 is the schedule indicated by the "first big winning opening (straight V route)" in FIG. 160 ("Special figure 2_5R time saving symbol" in FIG. 158. 1 ”,“ Special Figure 2_16R Time Saving Symbol 1 ”, and“ Special Figure 2_16R Time Saving Symbol 2 ”same as the schedule). In the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, both the first structure 2061 and the second structure 2062 operate.

When the small hit game starts, the opening effect of 3000 ms is executed, and then the first big winning opening 2005 is opened according to the schedule shown by the pattern D in FIG. 155. During the period when the first prize opening 2005 is open (except for the first opening), the first structure 2061 is in the ON state. As a result, when the game ball B enters the first prize opening 2005 during the period, the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061. The first structure 2061 is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed from the completion of the final opening of the first large winning opening 2005 in the small hit game. Further, the second structure is turned on for a predetermined time from the timing when the first structure 2061 is turned off, and the second structure 2062 is turned off after the predetermined time has elapsed.

As a result, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061 reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is open, and enters the specific area 2063. Therefore, when the game ball B is entered into the first large winning opening 2005 during the small hit game, one game ball B is entered into the specific area 2063 with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1). be able to. That is, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061 reaches the first structure 2061 and the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is open. The second structure 2062 operates.

Since the closing period (5.420 seconds (pattern D1 in FIG. 155)) between the first opening and the second opening of the first prize opening 2005 is long, the first opening is also completed. One structure 2061 is temporarily turned off.

For example, in both the small hit game won in the first special symbol lottery and the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, the final opening of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed after the start of the small hit game. Before the end, the effect display device 1600 or the like is used to perform a so-called right-handed effect to encourage the game ball B to enter the first prize opening 2005.

In the example of FIG. 160, the time from the start of the small hit game to the arrival of the period (the second and subsequent opening periods) in which the first major winning opening 2005 is continuously opened in a short period of time is useful. The straight V route is shorter than the physical route. This is due to the following reasons.

The direct V route is selected only when the small hit is won by the second special lottery, and when the small hit is won by the second special lottery, all the direct V routes that can win the big hit are selected with an extremely high probability. NS. In principle, the second special lottery is held only during the time saving state or immediately after the time saving state ends. In other words, winning a small hit in which the direct V route is selected is substantially equivalent to winning a series of big hits. Therefore, in order to make the player feel the speed of the big hit consecutive villa, the period during which the first big winning opening 2005 is continuously opened in a short period of time after the small hit game in which the direct V route is selected starts. (Opening period after the second time), the time until the arrival is set short.

In addition, even for the small hit game that is won by the second special symbol lottery, if the ratio of selecting the accessory route instead of the direct V route is high, the first big prize will be won after the small hit game starts. It is desirable that the direct V route has a longer time until the period when the mouth 2005 is continuously opened in a short period of time (the second and subsequent opening periods) arrives than the accessory route. In this case, the ratio of the direct V route selected is low, and when the direct V route is selected, the jackpot can be won with an extremely high probability, so that the time in the direct V route is lengthened. As a result, the player can be given a sense of rarity and an uplifting feeling. In other words, is it intended to make the player feel the speed of the jackpot villa, or is it intended to entertain by the movement of the game ball whether or not a substantial jackpot can be obtained by the character route? The time may be set as appropriate according to the purpose.

Hereinafter, an example of a detailed effect during the small hit game when the small hit game is won in the first special symbol lottery in the non-time saving state will be described. For example, during the first special symbol change in which the small hit game is won, a battle effect using the effect display device 1600 is executed, and the ally character is defeated in the battle effect. Then, a revival production will be performed in which new ally characters will participate. In the revival production, the new ally character utters a line such as "Compete with me!", And when the symbol of the first special symbol change is confirmed, a battle production by the new ally character is performed on the production display device 1600. Stops the decorative symbol (that is, the small hit confirmation symbol) indicating that it is confirmed that is executed. In addition, for example, it is not always necessary to display a sign indicating defeat, such as when a ally character wins and a line such as "Believe in your own power!" Is displayed on the production display device 1600 or the like. Needless to say.

Subsequently, for example, at the same time as the start of the opening effect of the small hit game, a small, so-called right-handed display is displayed on the upper right of the effect display device 1600. At the same time as the end of the opening effect, the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character starts on the effect display device 1600, and the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed.

Subsequently, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 15 seconds after) from the start of the closing period of the first first grand prize opening 2005, a display prompting the effect display device 1600 to hit the right side is performed. At this time, the battle between the ally character and the enemy character continues. Further, the large right-handed display may be performed and the small right-handed display may be deleted at the same time, or these two right-handed displays may be displayed at the same time. At the same time as the end of the opening effect, a timer indicating the remaining time until a large right-handed display is displayed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Since the closing period of the first major winning opening 2005 is 19.364 seconds, if there is a large right-handed display on the production display device 1600 from the start of the small hit game, the player immediately starts right-handed. However, there is a possibility that the game ball B cannot be won in the first major winning opening 2005 for a long time, and as a result, the ball output rate may decrease, and the player's interest in playing the game may decrease. Therefore, as described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the closing period of the first first grand prize opening 2005, the effect display device 1600 is displayed to greatly urge the right-handed strike. In other words, even if you are hitting right, it is extremely difficult and easy to put the game ball into the big winning opening, and while the purpose of "hit right" is the same, the display mode is different. ing.

Subsequently, when it is determined that the game ball B heads toward the distribution member 2070 (specifically, for example, a sensor that detects the game ball B entering the first grand prize opening 2005, or the first structure 2061. When the sensor that detects that the game ball B is held in the depression is detected), the mode in which the ally character is powered up in the battle effect is displayed. Further, at this time, the right-handed display on the effect display device 1600 may be deleted, or a display indicating that the right-handed display such as "Right-handed completion!" May be completed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. You may.

Subsequently, when the game ball B that has reached the distribution member 2070 reaches the specific area 2063, the effect that the ally character has won the battle is executed on the effect display device 1600, and the game ball B that has reached the distribution member 2070. When the character cannot reach the specific area 2063 (that is, when it passes through the second opening or the third opening), the ally character executes the effect of losing the battle on the effect display device 1600.

In the small hits won in the second special symbol lottery, for example, during the closing period (5.420 seconds) of the first first big winning opening 2005, if the winning is done during the stock time described later, the stock will be released. If the winner is in the final rock-paper-scissors production, which will be described later, a display production that greatly encourages right-handedness will be performed at the same time as the closing period starts.

[14-3. Stock time production overview]
The outline of the stock time production will be described below. 161 to 163 are explanatory views showing an example of an outline of the stock time effect. Note that FIGS. 162 and 163 show an example of an outline of the production when the stock can be acquired in the stock time production.

FIG. 168 is a table showing an example of the fluctuation time of each of the second special symbol fluctuations 1 to 5 times after the time saving state starts. When the 1st to 5th fluctuations are lost fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 205 seconds, 1 second, 1 second, 15 seconds, and 1 second, respectively. Further, when the 1st to 5th fluctuations are hit fluctuations (that is, jackpot or small hit fluctuations), the fluctuation time is 215 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, respectively. In this way, regardless of whether the special symbol change is successful or not, a longer fluctuation time is selected for the first change as compared with the other changes.

The stock time production is a production that is executed after the jackpot game with a short time is completed. FIG. 161 (A) shows a state in which the ending effect of the jackpot game with a short time is being performed. In the example of FIG. 161, it is assumed that the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are not held at the end of the jackpot game. In addition, the jackpot shall not be the jackpot won in the special symbol lottery during the stock time production and the final rock-paper-scissors production described later (that is, the condition that the time reduction is given in the first special symbol lottery in the non-time saving state). If you meet).

In (B), when the ending effect of the jackpot game is completed and the time saving state starts, a display prompting the player to hit the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 by hitting right ("Right hit !!" Display, hereinafter also simply referred to as right-handed display) is displayed at the lower part and the upper right part of the effect display device 1600. For example, the right-handed display at the bottom of the effect display device 1600 has a larger size than the right-handed display at the upper right (not limited to this, for example, a display with a large number of right-handed displays and a different color from the surroundings). , Or a blinking display, etc., as long as it is easy for the player to recognize).

In (C), one game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 in the state of (B), and the second special symbol variation is started as the first special symbol variation after the end of the big hit. At the same time as the start of the second special symbol variation, the effect display device 1600 is displayed to indicate that the stock time effect has started. In addition, the player executes a right-handed hit to save the hold of the second special symbol change.

(D) is a state after 5 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation. From 5 seconds after the start of the second special symbol variation, a timer indicating the remaining 200 seconds is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the remaining time of the timer decreases with the passage of time. At the same time as the timer is displayed, the display indicating that the stock time effect in (C) has started is deleted. After the display indicating that the stock time effect has started is erased, a display indicating that the stock time effect is being produced is displayed on the effect display device 1600, for example, at the lower left. The timing at which the display indicating that the stock time effect in (C) has started is deleted may be after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timer display (for example, 5 seconds later). In addition, the player executes a right-handed hit to save the hold of the second special symbol change.

(E) is a state in which the remaining time of the timer is 185 seconds (that is, 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), and four holdings of the second special symbol change are accumulated. When four reservations for the second special symbol change are accumulated, the right-handed display at the bottom of the effect display device 1600 is erased. It should be noted that the right-handed display in the upper right portion is always displayed, for example, during the time saving state.

Further, the decorative symbol fluctuates at the same time as the start of the second special symbol fluctuation, and the dummy fluctuation of the decorative symbol is performed within 20 seconds from the start of the decrease in the timer value. The dummy variation of the decorative pattern is, for example, as in the state of (E), pretending that the decorative pattern is stopped by the combination of loss (specifically, for example, the combination of loss is not completely stopped). , Displayed in a small shaking mode), and the variation of the decorative pattern is restarted. In the dummy variation, instead of the combination of the loss of the decorative pattern, it may appear that the predetermined image for the dummy variation is stopped.

(F) is a state in which the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation). The dummy fluctuation of the decorative pattern is finished, and the Janken game production starts. After the dummy change is completed, the decorative design continues to change until the design is confirmed.

Although the details will be described later, when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the peripheral control MPU is about the reserved special symbol fluctuation transmitted from the main control MPU. With reference to the special symbol pre-determination command, it is determined in advance whether or not each of the reserved special symbol fluctuations is a hit variation (that is, a big hit variation or a small hit variation).

Peripheral control MPU is included in the second special symbol fluctuation that is held when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation) and the second special symbol fluctuation that is being executed (that is, the second special symbol fluctuation that is being executed). That is, based on the total number of fluctuations (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of stocks) per fluctuation (which does not apply to the first special symbol fluctuation), the effect after 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is determined.

At the time of (F), the remaining time of the timer was 180 seconds, and the peripheral control MPU won the effect of the remaining 180 seconds with a plurality of rock-paper-scissors game effects of 15 seconds or 30 seconds and a rock-paper-scissors game effect. It is constructed using a 15-second stock appeal effect that is subsequently executed. Every time you win a rock-paper-scissors game, you will be notified that there is one hit fluctuation (stock). The details will be described later, but the number of times the combination production (also called stock production) of the rock-paper-scissors game victory production (also called stock success production) and the stock appeal production is executed is less than the number of unreported stocks.

FIGS. 162 and 163 describe an example in which the number of stocks is two. In addition, the second special symbol fluctuation during execution is a loss fluctuation (that is, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation is 205 seconds), and one of the hit fluctuations is the second following the second special symbol fluctuation during execution. (Ii) It shall be a special symbol variation.

(G) is a state in which the first rock-paper-scissors game production is being performed. (H) is the state in which the player won the first rock-paper-scissors game. In the following description, it is assumed that the hand displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600 is the hand of the ally character and the hand displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. The first rock-paper-scissors game production is executed using the remaining time of the timer for 15 seconds from 180 seconds to 165 seconds.

(I) is a state in which the stock appeal production performed after the victory production of the rock-paper-scissors game production is performed. The effect display device 1600 is notified that the first stock has been acquired (display of "stock GET x 1 !!" in the figure). The first stock appeal effect is executed using the remaining time of the timer for 15 seconds from 165 seconds to 150 seconds.

(J) is a state in which the stock appeal production is finished and the second rock-paper-scissors game production is started. A display indicating that there is stock that has been notified in the stock appeal effect (ST in the figure, hereinafter also referred to as a stock display) is displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600, for example. The stock display is displayed, for example, until the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the stock, or until the start or end of the hit game corresponding to the stock (when the hit corresponding to the stock is a small hit). It may be (until the start or end of the big hit game) that rushes in with the small hit as an opportunity.

In addition, for example, in the stock appeal production, when notifying a hit with a large number of balls to be obtained, such as a big hit of "15R time-saving symbol 1" and a small hit of "16R time-saving symbol 1", a predetermined ratio is used. You may perform a premium effect (for example, notification by a character dedicated to the premium effect). In this case, the stock display on the upper left of the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the stock appeal effect may also be a premium mode (for example, a character dedicated to the premium effect is displayed).

(K) is a state in which the stock time has ended, that is, 205 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and the second special symbol fluctuation, which is a loss fluctuation, has ended. The effect display device 1600 displays a combination of decorative patterns that are lost. As described above, since the number of stocks is two, one more stock is notified by the end of the stock time, and at the end of the fluctuation, two stock displays are displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600.

In the example of (K), the left decorative symbol is stopped at "5", the middle decorative symbol is stopped at "2", and the right decorative symbol is stopped at "4" as a combination of lost decorative symbols, but the stock is notified. Even if the special combination of decorative symbols that reminds us of a hit (for example, the left decorative symbol and the right have the same number and the center decorative symbol is "V") is stopped. good. Further, even if the stock is not notified at the stock time but there is a hold corresponding to the fluctuation in the hold, the dedicated combination may be stopped at a predetermined ratio.

FIG. 163 (L) is a state in which the second special symbol variation (variation time is 10 seconds, see FIG. 168), which is the second variation, which is a small hit variation, has started. In (M), the combination of decorative symbols indicating small hits is stopped, and an effect indicating that one stock has been released (display of "stock release !!") is executed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of (M), the stock display corresponding to the first stock is erased at the end of the second special symbol change. When the stock display is in the premium mode, the stock release effect may also be in the premium mode (for example, notification of stock release by a character dedicated to the premium effect).

(N) is a state in which the small hit game has started. In order to allow the game ball B to enter the specific area 2063 in the first prize opening 2005, a large right-handed display is displayed at the bottom of the production display device 1600, and the first prize opening such as "Aim for V !!" A display prompting you to aim at a specific area in 2005 is displayed. (O) is a state in which the big hit game is started by the game ball B entering the specific area 2063 during the small hit game. Even if the jackpot game starts, the stock display corresponding to the unreleased stock is not erased.

In the example of FIG. 162, one stock was notified in one stock appeal effect, but when there are a plurality of unnotified stocks, a plurality of stocks are notified in one stock appeal effect. You may. In the stock appeal effect, when notifying a plurality of stocks, an effect different from the case of notifying one stock may be executed. For example, it is preferable that a plurality of stocks are notified by a notification by a character dedicated to a plurality of stock notifications, a dedicated sound effect, a dedicated lighting pattern by various lamps, and the like.

Further, when notifying a plurality of stocks, a rock-paper-scissors effect different from the normal rock-paper-scissors effect may be executed. For example, when a special ally character or enemy character appears and wins the rock-paper-scissors production, or when the player wins the rock-paper-scissors with a predetermined combination of hands (for example, when the ally is "par" and the enemy character gives "goo". ), Or when an ally puts out a hand with a special aspect (for example, a hand with the little finger and ring finger folded and the other fingers extended), the production pattern is determined so that multiple stocks are confirmed. You may be.

In the examples of FIGS. 162 and 163, an example in which the second special symbol fluctuation of the first fluctuation is a loss fluctuation is described, but the second special symbol fluctuation of the first fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (variation time is 215 seconds). In some cases, the stock release is signaled using 10 seconds after the end of the stock time.

164, 165, 166, and 167 show the case where no stock is acquired in the stock time production, that is, the reserved second special symbol variation and the running second special symbol variation. An example of the outline of the stock time production when the total number of hit fluctuations (stock) is 0 is shown. Even when the stock cannot be obtained, the effects of FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (F) are the same. Following FIG. 161 (F), the state transitions to the state of FIG. 164 (G').

(G') is a state in which the first rock-paper-scissors game is being produced. (H') is the state of being defeated in the first rock-paper-scissors game. The first rock-paper-scissors game production is executed using the remaining time of the timer for 15 seconds from 180 seconds to 165 seconds. Since he was defeated in the rock-paper-scissors game production, no stock appeal production will be performed.

(I') is the state in which the second rock-paper-scissors game production has started. (J') is a state in which the stock time has ended, that is, 205 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and the second special symbol fluctuation, which is a loss fluctuation, has ended. The effect display device 1600 displays a combination of lost decorative patterns. Further, as described above, since the number of stocks is 0, the stock is not displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600 at the end of the fluctuation.

(K') is a state in which the second special symbol change of the second change, which is a loss change, has been completed. The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the display of the end of the stock time of the effect display device 1600 remains.

(L') in FIG. 165 is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the third variation, which is a loss variation, has been completed. The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the display of the end of the stock time of the effect display device 1600 remains.

(M') is a state in which the second special symbol change of the fourth change, which is a loss change, has started. As described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation of the second and third fluctuations, which is the loss fluctuation, is short (1 second), but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation of the fourth fluctuation, which is the loss fluctuation. Is longer (15 seconds) than these. The hold charge effect is performed using this fluctuation time.

For example, the hold charge effect starts at the same time as the start of the second special symbol change. At the start of the hold charge effect, for example, a right-handed display similar to that shown in FIG. 161 (B) is displayed at the lower part of the effect display device 1600, and a hold charge start display indicating that the hold charge effect has started is displayed at the center. , Prompts the player to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. The hold charge start display is displayed, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the hold charge effect, or when a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, one or four with the maximum number of holds) have entered the second start port 2004. And it will be erased.

(N') is a state in which the second special symbol change of the fourth change, which is a loss change, has been completed. When all four reservations for the second special symbol change have been accumulated, a display indicating that all the reservations have been accumulated (“Charge full !!” in the figure) is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display is displayed. The right-handed display displayed at the bottom of the device 1600 is erased. Since the fluctuation is a loss fluctuation, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed.

(O') is a state in which the fifth variation (variation time is 1 second), which is a loss variation, has been completed. The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped on the effect display device 1600. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation during the non-time reduction state, and the production prior to the final rock-paper-scissors production, which will be described later, is composed of four fluctuations during the time reduction and one fluctuation during the time reduction.

In the example of FIG. 164, an example in which the fifth fluctuation is a loss fluctuation has been described, but when the first to fourth fluctuations are loss fluctuations and the fifth fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, the fourth fluctuation is The hold charge effect is not executed in. In this case, a special effect straddling from the second variation to the fifth variation is executed, and the hit is notified at the fifth variation.

Therefore, in principle, when all of the 1st to 5th fluctuations are lost fluctuations, the hold charge effect and the final rock-paper-scissors effect described later are executed. However, if the prize corresponding to the 5th fluctuation is performed after the start of the 2nd fluctuation, or if the winning is performed after the timing of pre-reading judgment in the 1st fluctuation, the 5th fluctuation is a hit fluctuation. Also, the hold charge effect is executed. It should be noted that the winning corresponding to the 5th fluctuation is performed after the start of the 2nd fluctuation or after the timing of pre-reading judgment in the 1st fluctuation, and the 1st to 4th fluctuations are lost fluctuations and the 5th fluctuation. If is a hit fluctuation, the dedicated effect is not executed, and the hit is suddenly notified at the fifth fluctuation.

When this special effect is performed, the fluctuation time of the second variation is 1 second, the variation time of the third variation is 1 second, the variation time of the fourth variation is 15 seconds, and the variation time of the fifth variation is 10 seconds. (See FIG. 168). Of the fluctuations in which the special effect is performed, the total fluctuation time of the 2nd to 4th fluctuations, which is the loss fluctuation, is longer than the fluctuation time of the 5th fluctuation, which is the hit fluctuation. In this way, since the fluctuation time of the 5th fluctuation, which is the hit fluctuation, is short, it is possible to secure a long time to execute the production by the dedicated production using the 2nd to 5th fluctuations, and to execute the production rich in interest. Can be done.

Although the details will be described later, if there is a fluctuation in the first to fourth fluctuations, a stock effect is always generated during the 180-second rock-paper-scissors production of the first fluctuation. Further, as described above, when the 1st to 4th fluctuations are lost and the 5th fluctuation is a hit, a dedicated effect is performed from the 2nd fluctuation. Therefore, if the stock effect does not appear in the first variation and the dedicated effect does not start from the second variation, the variation up to the fifth variation is confirmed to be lost. If the second, third, and fifth fluctuations other than the fourth fluctuation in which the hold charge effect is performed are lost fluctuations, a short fluctuation time (1 second) is selected, and the second special symbol fluctuation is suspended in the fourth fluctuation. It is set as a long time (a time longer than the second, third, and fifth fluctuations) in which the time for accumulating to the maximum is secured.

In addition, although the example of notifying the presence or absence of stock by the rock-paper-scissors production has been described, it goes without saying that the presence or absence of stock may be notified by a production different from the rock-paper-scissors production, such as a background change production or a dialogue production. .. Even in that case, it goes without saying that the dialogue production may have higher expectations as a stock production than the background change production, so that the expectations may differ depending on the type of production.

Hereinafter, the production of the 6th to 8th fluctuations will be described. The final rock-paper-scissors production is executed using the 6th to 8th fluctuations, which are the fluctuations reserved for the 4th fluctuation. When the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a hit variation from the 6th variation to the 8th variation based on the special symbol pre-judgment command, the final rock-paper-scissors production that spans from the 6th variation to the earliest hit variation among them is performed. It is executed as a continuous effect (however, if the sixth variation is a hit variation, the final rock-paper-scissors effect using only the sixth variation is executed).

In addition, if the peripheral control MPU determines that there is no hit variation from the 6th variation to the 8th variation based on the special symbol pre-judgment command, the peripheral control MPU continuously produces a final rock-paper-scissors effect that spans the 6th to 8th variation. Run as.

The timing at which the peripheral control MPU determines the effect content with reference to the special symbol pre-determination command may be either during the execution of the 4th or 5th variation or at the start of the 6th variation. Peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol pre-judgment command at a predetermined timing of the fourth variation (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the variation) for performing the hold charge effect, so that the "final rock-paper-scissors" is performed during the hold charge effect. Etc. can be displayed in a highly expected manner (for example, red characters). In addition, after the lapse of the predetermined time, there is a high possibility that the 6th to 8th fluctuation hold is accumulated. Further, since the fluctuation time of the fourth fluctuation is longer than the fluctuation time of the fifth fluctuation, it is easy to execute such a look-ahead effect.

In each fluctuation where the final rock-paper-scissors production is performed, for example, a rock-paper-scissors game is performed. In the final rock-paper-scissors production, in the fluctuation that announces the hit, the rock-paper-scissors game is won, and in the fluctuation that announces the loss, the rock-paper-scissors game is defeated.

However, if the 7th or 8th fluctuation is the first hit fluctuation, the rate at which Aiko is selected for the fluctuation before the hit fluctuation in the final rock-paper-scissors production is the case of all the 6th to 8th fluctuations being lost. It is assumed that the ratio of rock-paper-scissors selected in the 6th or 7th variation is higher than that in. That is, Aiko in the final rock-paper-scissors production is a chance pattern. Note that, for example, only when the 8th variation is the earliest hit variation, both the 6th variation and the 7th variation may be selected, that is, both the 6th variation and the 7th variation may be selected. If this is the case, the 8th fluctuation may be confirmed as a hit.

Hereinafter, in the examples of FIGS. 165, 166, and 167, the 6th and 7th fluctuations are lost fluctuations, and the 8th fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, that is, the final rock-paper-scissors spanning from the 6th fluctuation to the 8th fluctuation. The effect is executed as a continuous effect, and the hit is notified at the 8th variation.

FIG. 169 is a table showing an example of the fluctuation time of each of the second special symbol fluctuations 6 to 8 times after the time saving state starts. When the 6th to 8th fluctuations are lost fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 225 seconds, 160 seconds, and 375 seconds, respectively. Further, when the 6th to 8th fluctuations are small hit fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 370 seconds, 305 seconds, and 380 seconds, respectively. Further, when the 6th to 8th fluctuations are jackpot fluctuations, the fluctuation time is 425 seconds, 360 seconds, and 440 seconds, respectively.

Returning to the description of FIG. 165. (P') is a state in which the sixth variation (variation time is 225 seconds), which is a loss variation, has started. A display indicating that the final rock-paper-scissors production has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(Q') is a continuation state of (P') in the sixth variation, which is a loss variation. A display (“Round 1 !!” in the figure) indicating that the first rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production will start is displayed on the production display device 1600. In addition, the effect display device 1600 displays a gauge indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The value of the gauge becomes 0 when the hit is notified, and the value of the gauge decreases at the time of the chance pattern (for example, at this time).

FIG. 166 (R') is a continuation state of (Q') at the sixth variation, which is a loss variation. A production that defeats the rock-paper-scissors game is being executed. The gauge value has not decreased because he lost the rock-paper-scissors game. (S') is the state at the end of the sixth variation, which is a loss variation. A display indicating that the final rock-paper-scissors production is still going on (“Still more !!” in the figure) is displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols has stopped.

(T') is a state in which the seventh variation (variation time is 160 seconds), which is a loss variation, has started. A display (“Round 2 !!” in the figure) indicating that the second rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production will start is displayed on the production display device 1600. (U') is a continuation state of (T') at the seventh variation, which is a loss variation. A different production is being performed in the rock-paper-scissors game. As mentioned above, Aiko in the rock-paper-scissors game is a chance pattern. As shown in (U'), for example, when the person becomes confused, the value of the gauge is reduced.

(V') is the state at the end of the seventh variation, which is a loss variation. Since the chance pattern Aiko was executed in the 7th fluctuation, the display showing that the final rock-paper-scissors production is still going on and that the expectation of winning in the rock-paper-scissors game in the next fluctuation is high ("Your hand to put out next is cut off" in the figure. !! ") is displayed. In addition, a combination of lost decorative patterns is displayed.

(W') is a state in which the eighth variation (the variation time is 440 seconds for a big hit and the variation time is 370 seconds or 385 seconds for a small hit), which is a hit variation, has started. A display (“final game !!” in the figure) indicating that the third, that is, the final rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production is about to start is displayed on the production display device 1600.

FIG. 167 (X') is a continuation state of (W') at the eighth variation, which is a hit variation. On the effect display device 1600, a display prompting the player to repeatedly hit the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. At this time, a display suggesting that the winning effect is approaching by repeated hits, such as "I can't see the enemy's hand !!", may be displayed. It should be noted that such a continuous striking effect may be executed at the 6th variation and / or the 7th variation when, for example, the hit expectation degree is higher than a predetermined value. Further, for the eighth variation, for example, the continuous striking effect may be always executed regardless of the degree of expectation of hitting.

(Y') is a continuation state of (X') in the eighth variation, which is a hit variation. After the continuous striking of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted (that is, after the central pressing operation unit 303a becomes effective), one of the predetermined number of times of pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the elapse of a predetermined time is satisfied. At that point, the state transitions to the (Y') state. The predetermined number of times may be set less as the hit expectation is higher and less as the hit expectation is lower. In (Y'), the production of winning the rock-paper-scissors game is being executed. Further, the value indicated by the gauge displayed on the effect display device 1600 is 0.

(Z') is the state at the end of the eighth variation, which is the hit variation. On the effect display device 1600, the combination of hits of the decorative symbols is stopped, and a message indicating that the hits are hit (“Congratulations !!” in the figure) is displayed.

As described above, a series of effects consisting of stock time and hold charge effect is executed using the fluctuation of the time saving state and the first fluctuation of the start of the non-time saving state (in the above example, from the start of the time saving state to the 1st to 5th fluctuations). Then, the final rock-paper-scissors effect is executed using the 2nd to 4th fluctuations in the non-time saving state (in the above example, from the start of the time saving state to the 6th to 8th fluctuations, that is, the last 3 second special symbol fluctuations). Has been done. Further, as described above, the average fluctuation time of each fluctuation in which the final rock-paper-scissors production is executed is the fluctuation in which the series of productions are executed (from the start of the time saving state to the 1st to 5th fluctuations) even if it is a loss fluctuation. Longer than the average fluctuation time of (variation) (see FIGS. 168 and 169). After entering the non-time saving state, the second special symbol fluctuation, in which the hit probability is set to be more advantageous, can be executed only four times at the maximum. The time is fixed. By setting the fluctuation time in the 7th fluctuation in FIG. 169 to exceed 215 seconds, all the fluctuation times in which the final rock-paper-scissors effect is executed are all the fluctuation times (time reduction) in which the series of effects are executed. It may be set longer than the fluctuation time from the start of the state to the 5th fluctuation).

In addition, the branch point between the series of productions and the final rock-paper-scissors production (at the start of the second variation in the non-time reduction state) arrives during the non-time reduction state for the following reasons. Immediately after falling into the non-time saving state, the second special symbol change with a higher hit probability is carried out up to four times. If the second special symbol variation in the first half (first time in the above example) is a loss variation, and in the second special symbol variation in the second half, if the effect in the same effect mode as the loss variation is executed, The player may not be able to get a sense of expectation for the hit. Therefore, by changing the effect mode during the non-time saving state in this way, the player's interest can be maintained.

From the viewpoint of maintaining the interest of the player in this way, it is preferable that the end timing of the series of effects is as early as possible after the start of the non-time reduction. That is, the end timing is the end of the second variation after the start of the non-time saving state from the end of the third variation after the start of the non-time saving state (that is, the final rock-paper-scissors effect is performed by the fourth variation after the start of the non-time saving state). Time (that is, the final rock-paper-scissors effect is performed with the 3rd to 4th fluctuations after the start of the non-time reduction state) is preferable, and further, the first time after the start of the non-time reduction state than the end of the second fluctuation after the start of the non-time reduction state. It is preferable at the end of the fluctuation (that is, the final rock-paper-scissors effect is performed at the 2nd to 4th fluctuation after the start of the non-time saving state).

As described above, the peripheral control MPU, for example, refers to the special symbol pre-determination command at a predetermined timing of the fourth variation in which the hold charge effect is performed, and suggests the result of the final rock-paper-scissors effect after the sixth variation. The judge effect may be executed at the fourth variation. For example, it is performed according to the distribution shown by the judge production table.

FIG. 174 is an example of a judge effect table. The judge effect table defines the distribution of the hand images selected in the judge effect for each number of holds at the predetermined timing, depending on whether or not there is a change in the fluctuation held by the predetermined timing. .. The distribution is decided so that the expectation is higher in the order of the hand wearing the red aura, the hand wearing the white aura, and the hand not wearing the aura.

A specific example of the judge production will be described. For example, before the predetermined timing during the hold charge effect, when there are 0 or 1 hold, the hand image is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when there are 2 holds, the hand image is displayed on the effect display device 1600. An image of a hand without an aura is displayed, and when there are three holds, an image of a hand without an aura and a hand with a white aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when there are four holds. An image of a hand without an aura, a hand with a white aura, and a hand with a red aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

That is, when the number of holds is changed from 1 to 2, an image of a hand without an aura is added on the effect display device 1600, and when the number of holds is changed from 2 to 3, a hand with a white aura is added on the effect display device 1600. The image of the hand is added on the effect display device 1600 when the number of hold is changed from 3 to 4. Even if the hold is added after the predetermined timing, the hand image is not added.

At the predetermined timing, the peripheral control MPU refers to the judge effect table and selects a hand. After the predetermined timing, the judge effect is started, and the peripheral control MPU displays the image of the selected hand on the effect display device 1600.

In the example of FIG. 174, when the number of holds is 2, a hand that does not wear an aura is selected in the judge production. When the number of holds is 3, a hand without an aura or a hand with a white aura is selected in the judge production. When the number of holds is 4, a hand without an aura, a hand with a white aura, or a hand with a red aura is selected in the judge production.

Therefore, the distribution of the judge effect table is determined so that the hand finally displayed in the judge effect is included in the hand displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the predetermined timing is reached. Then, in the final rock-paper-scissors production, the ally character plays a rock-paper-scissors game with the selected hand. For example, if a hand wearing a red aura is selected, the hand of the ally character is wearing a red aura in all the rock-paper-scissors games in the final rock-paper-scissors production.

When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, the judge effect is not executed (not displayed in FIG. 174). This is because the final rock-paper-scissors effect is not executed when the fluctuation in which the hold charge effect is performed is completed while the number of holds is 0 or 1.

In addition, in the hit variation of the number of reservations 2, the "white aura" and the "red aura" may also be set to extremely small distributions. Similarly, in the hit fluctuation of the number of reservations 3, a very small distribution may be set for the "red aura". Specifically, for example, the distribution in the hit fluctuation of the number of holds 2 is 0 for "no display", 98 for "no aura", 1 for "white aura", 1 for "red aura", and 3 for the number of holds. The distribution in the hit variation may be 0 for "no display", 50 for "no aura", 49 for "white aura", and 1 for "red aura".

By setting the distribution in this way, if a hand that is not included in the hand displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the time when the predetermined timing is reached is selected in the judge effect, there may be a hit variation. It will be confirmed. Further, by setting the distribution in which such a definite effect occurs to be small, it is possible to obtain a premium effect. Therefore, the occurrence of such an effect can give the player a feeling of exhilaration. Further, when there are four holds, such a definite effect does not appear, so that the player can be provided with the enjoyment as a hidden effect.

[14-4. Information for executing stock time production]
Hereinafter, a table that defines information necessary for executing the above-mentioned stock time production and final rock-paper-scissors production will be described. In this chapter, three fluctuation pattern tables (table A, table B, and table C (all not shown)) are stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines the fluctuation pattern. First, one fluctuation pattern table is selected from the three fluctuation pattern tables, and a fluctuation pattern is selected from the selected fluctuation pattern table.

FIG. 170 is an example of a variation pattern table selection table. The variation pattern table selection table is a table for selecting one variation pattern table from the above-mentioned three variation pattern tables, and is stored in, for example, a ROM in the main control board 1310.

The variable pattern table selection table is, for example, the state at the time of winning the latest big hit (in the case of a big hit via a small hit, the small hit) (time saving state or non-time saving state), and the latest big hit (the big hit via a small hit). In the case, the type of the small hit), the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation of the selection target of the fluctuation pattern table from the end of the latest big hit, the current state (time saving state or non-time saving state), and the selection target fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table. A migration destination table is defined for each type (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).

Although the number of times of granting time is defined for each hit type in the variation pattern table selection table, it may be managed in another table. As described above, the end of the time saving state is the end of the fourth change of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state, and the eighth special symbol change after the start of the time saving state (that is, the special figure 1 and the special figure 1). This is the earliest of the end of (the total number of fluctuations in FIG. 2 is 8) or the start of the jackpot game.

In the example of FIG. 170, the latest big hit is a big hit via the small hit of "Special Figure 1_6R Time Saving Symbol 1", the small hit is won in the non-time saving state, and the current state is the non-time saving state. The cell corresponding to the change in the special figure 2 which is the sixth change from the end of the big hit is the cell 1651 in the change pattern table selection table. Therefore, for the variation, the variation pattern is selected from the table A corresponding to the cell 1651.

Further, for example, the latest big hit is a big hit via the small hit of "Special Figure 2_16R Time-saving symbol 1", the small hit is won in the time-saving state, the current state is the time-saving state, and the big hit ends. The cell corresponding to the change of the special figure 2 which is the second change from the above is cell 1652 in the change pattern table selection table. Therefore, for the variation, the variation pattern is selected from the table B corresponding to cell 1652.

In the example of FIG. 170, regardless of the latest jackpot type or fluctuation type, the selection target fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table (hereinafter, also simply referred to as the target fluctuation in this chapter) is the fluctuation after the ninth fluctuation (so-called normal time). ), Table A is selected. In addition, when the latest jackpot is a time-saving jackpot, the target variation is the variation shown in Special Figure 2, and the target variation is the 6th to 8th variation after the end of the jackpot (in this case, non-time saving is in progress). , Table A is selected.

In addition, when the latest jackpot is a time-saving jackpot, the target variation is the variation shown in Special Figure 1, and the target variation is the 1st to 8th variation after the end of the jackpot (that is, the 1st to 8th variation in the time-saving state). Table A is selected. That is, the table A is always selected in the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time saving state. Table A is always selected in the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time saving state. If the latest jackpot is a time-saving jackpot, the target variation is the variation shown in Special Figure 2, and the target variation is the first variation after the end of the jackpot (that is, the first variation in the time-saving state), Table A shows. Be selected.

For example, the fluctuation time of the first variation in the first variation in the time saving state in the table A is 205 seconds in the case of the loss variation and 215 seconds in the case of the hit variation. As a result, the variation time of the first variation (that is, the first variation of the stock time effect) shown in FIG. 168 is realized. Further, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of the first variation of the first variation in the table A in the time saving state is as long as that of the special figure 2 (205 seconds in the case of the loss variation and 215 seconds in the case of the hit variation). If the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is short, a sufficient number of game balls B cannot be inserted into the second starting port 2004 if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state. This is because there is a risk that the number of times the second special symbol changes will be less than the planned number of times, which is disadvantageous to the player. It should be noted that the above-mentioned stock time effect is performed even in the special figure 1 fluctuation having such a long fluctuation time.

In Table A, the fluctuation time when the sixth variation is the special figure 2 is 225 seconds when it is a loss variation, 370 seconds when it is a small hit variation, and 425 seconds when it is a big hit variation. Further, in Table A, the fluctuation time when the seventh fluctuation is the special figure 2 is 160 seconds when it is a loss fluctuation, 305 seconds when it is a small hit fluctuation, and 360 seconds when it is a big hit fluctuation. be. Further, in Table A, the fluctuation time when the eighth fluctuation is the special figure 2 is 375 seconds when it is a loss fluctuation, 370 seconds or 385 when it is a small hit fluctuation, and 440 when it is a big hit fluctuation. Seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time during the final rock-paper-scissors production shown in FIG. 169 is realized.

Further, in the example of FIG. 170, the latest jackpot is a time-saving jackpot, the target variation is the variation of special figure 2, and the target variation is the fifth variation after the end of the jackpot (in this case, in the non-time-saving state). Yes), Table B is selected. In addition, when the latest jackpot is a time-saving jackpot, the target variation is the variation shown in Special Figure 2, and the target variation is the second or third variation after the end of the jackpot (that is, the second or third variation in the time-saving state). , Table B is selected. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the fluctuation pattern in the table B is 1 second in the case of the loss fluctuation and 10 seconds in the case of the hit fluctuation. As a result, the fluctuations of the second, third, and fifth fluctuations shown in FIG. 168 (changes after the end of the stock time and before the start of the hold charge effect, and changes after the end of the hold charge effect and before the start of the final rock-paper-scissors effect). Time is realized.

Further, in the example of FIG. 170, the latest jackpot is a time-saving jackpot, the target variation is the variation of special figure 2, and the target variation is the fourth variation after the end of the jackpot (that is, the fourth variation in the time-saving state). If so, table C is selected. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the fluctuation pattern in the table C is 15 seconds in the case of the loss fluctuation and 10 seconds in the case of the hit fluctuation. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fourth variation (that is, the variation of the hold charge effect) shown in FIG. 168 is realized. As described above, in the example of FIG. 170, when the big hit of "Special Figure 1-2R Time Saving No Symbol 1" is won in the time saving state, the time saving state is given. However, the hold charge effect is performed for 15 seconds in the case of a loss fluctuation.

FIG. 171 is an example of a stock time effect block table. The stock time effect table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The stock time effect block table is an effect executed from the state of FIG. 161 (F) (when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, that is, when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation) until the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 seconds. Is a table that defines.

The stock time effect block table holds the correspondence between the number of unreported stocks, the effect contents of each effect block, and the distribution. The number of unreported stocks is the number of hits in the running second special symbol change and the held special symbol change, and is not notified in the stock time production before the second special symbol change during the execution. It is the number of hit fluctuations.

Specifically, for example, a jackpot with a time reduction is won by a special symbol fluctuation in a state where there is no hold during non-time reduction, and after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started, and 25 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. It is assumed that the holdings of the fluctuations of the four special figures 2 are accumulated until later (until the pre-reading determination described above is performed). Further, it is assumed that there are three hit fluctuations including the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the fluctuation among the five fluctuations of the special figure 2 in total. In this case, for example, three stocks are notified at the stock time. In addition, when the fluctuation during the fluctuation is completed, the jackpot is entered, and after the jackpot is completed, the time is shortened again. In this case, the player is informed of the existence of two hit fluctuations excluding the digested hit. Therefore, for example, if one new hold of Special Figure 2 is accumulated by 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation that starts immediately after the end of the jackpot in this state, if the hold is a hold of the hit fluctuation, the unreported stock The number is one, and if the hold is a hold of loss fluctuation, the number of unreported stocks is zero.

The 180 seconds from 180 seconds to 0 seconds remaining in the timer are managed by being divided into 12 effect blocks of 15 seconds each. That is, each record in the stock time effect block table defines a 180-second effect schedule by defining the effect content of each effect block.

The crosses described in each effect block column (effects 1 to 12) indicate that a 15-second stock failure effect (that is, defeat or Aiko in a rock-paper-scissors game) is executed. In addition, the black triangle is a 30-second stock failure production consisting of two adjacent production blocks (for example, even if a defeat or Aiko appears in a rock-paper-scissors game, the defeat or Aiko does not execute the rock-paper-scissors production from scratch, but the defeat or Aiko After being displayed, the character shouts "Is the character finished as it is?" And challenges the rock-paper-scissors again, but eventually loses, indicating that a series of productions using 30 seconds) will be executed. In addition, the black circle indicates that a stock success effect (that is, victory in a rock-paper-scissors game) is executed for 15 seconds or for 30 seconds consisting of two adjacent effect blocks. Further, the white circle indicates that the stock appeal effect is executed for 15 seconds immediately after the stock success effect. Hereinafter, the combination of the stock success effect and the stock appeal effect executed immediately after the stock success effect is also referred to as a stock effect.

In the example of FIG. 171, the stock effect is not selected in the first and last effect blocks (effect 1 and effect 12) in all the effect schedules. If the stock effect is executed immediately after entering the time saving state, the player may feel hectic, so the stock failure effect is always selected in the first effect block. In addition, since the stock failure production is always selected in the final production block, the player's feelings are calmed down when no stock is notified in the production schedule up to 165 seconds (up to production 11). be able to. However, the stock appeal in the effect 12 is executed when the stock effect is executed in the effect 11. Further, in all the production schedules, the stock failure production is selected in the production 9. As a result, the player's feelings ahead of the last three production blocks (the production of the remaining 45 seconds) can be calmed down once.

In addition, the stock effect column specifies the stock effect to be executed in the effect schedule. "No stock effect" is selected when the number of unreported stocks is 0. "Stock effect 1" and "stock effect 2" are selected when the number of unreported stocks is one. "Stock effect 3" and "stock effect 4" are selected when the number of unreported stocks is two. "Stock effect 5" and "stock effect 6" are selected when the number of unreported stocks is three. "Stock effect 7" and "stock effect 8" are selected when the number of unreported stocks is 4 or 5.

A specific description will be given in FIG. 171. For example, when the number of unreported stocks is 1, the effect numbers 5 to 16 are distributed. In this case, for example, the effect number 5 is selected by 64/256, and the effect number 9 is selected by 16/256. For example, when the effect number 5 is selected, the stock success effect is performed by the effect 2 (the effect that starts 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation).

FIG. 172 is an example of a stock effect specific table. The stock effect specifying table specifies a winning effect lottery table for drawing the stock effect executed in each effect schedule. In the peripheral control ROM, for example, a 30-second effect lottery table (not shown) and a 45-second effect lottery table (not shown) are stored.

The 30-second production lottery table consists of one or more stock productions, each consisting of a 15-second stock success production and a 15-second stock appeal production (30 seconds in total), and the distribution of each of the one or more stock productions. , Store. The 45-second production lottery table consists of one or more stock productions, each consisting of a 30-second stock success production and a 15-second stock appeal production (45 seconds in total), and the distribution of each of the one or more stock productions. , Store.

That is, for example, when the peripheral control MPU selects an effect in which the value of the stock effect column of the stock time effect block table is "stock effect 4", the peripheral control MPU refers to the stock effect specific table, and the first stock effect is performed. The effect content is selected according to the distribution of the lottery table per 30 seconds, and for the second stock effect, the effect content is selected according to the distribution of the lottery table per 45 seconds.

As described above, the peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol pre-determination command for the reserved special symbol fluctuation transmitted from the main control MPU, and refers to the time when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, that is, 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. At the elapsed time, it is determined whether or not each of the reserved special symbol fluctuations has a hit fluctuation. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not each of the reserved special symbol fluctuations has a hit variation.

For example, if the main control MPU has already sent a pre-judgment command for the pending fluctuation and there is a new start prize before the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation corresponding to the start prize is a hit fluctuation. The pre-judgment command may be sent to the user, and the pre-judgment command may not be sent when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is a loss fluctuation.

The peripheral control MPU subtracts the number of notified stocks from the total number of hit fluctuations included in the special symbol fluctuations held 25 seconds after the start of fluctuations and the special symbol fluctuations being executed. Calculated as the number of unreported stocks. The peripheral control MPU realizes the above-mentioned stock time effect by referring to the stock time effect block table and selecting the effect corresponding to the number of unreported stocks according to the distribution indicated by the distribution column to determine the effect. be able to.

If the hit fluctuation is suspended after the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, the notification as stock is not executed for the hit fluctuation. For the hit variation that was not notified as stock, for example, the hit is notified when the hit variation is executed.

However, the peripheral control MPU performs the effect at a predetermined timing after the time when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (for example, at the end of each effect block. However, since one stock effect requires a minimum of 30 seconds, the effect is produced. 11 and the end of the effect 12 are excluded.), The number of unreported stocks may be calculated again. In this case, for example, the peripheral control MPU replaces a part of the stock failure production of the selected production schedule with the stock production, or reselects the production schedule capable of notifying the unreported stock, thereby performing the production schedule. Is changed on the way. The timing of calculating the number of unreported stocks again and changing the effect schedule according to the calculation result may be once or a plurality of times.

For example, if the hit fluctuation is suspended before the initial stock number calculation timing, in principle, the stock production corresponding to the hit fluctuation is announced at the stock time. In this case, if there is a winning prize on hold of the hit fluctuation after the first stock number calculation timing and before the second and subsequent stock number calculation timing, the stock production corresponding to the hit is performed at the stock time. The production may be changed, or the next stock time (in principle, a time reduction is given to the big hit corresponding to the hit fluctuation before the initial stock number calculation timing, and the stock time is entered again). A stock effect corresponding to the hit fluctuation may be performed.

In addition, if there is no hold of hit fluctuation before the first stock number calculation timing, and if there is a hit fluctuation prize after the first stock number calculation timing and before the second and subsequent stock number calculation timing. , The effect may be changed so that the stock effect corresponding to the hit is performed at the stock time, or the hit effect may be suddenly executed without changing the effect at the stock time. (For example, sudden notification of hit fluctuations).

For a player who does not want to be notified of the number of hits in the stock time, the above timing may be notified in advance by a timer display or the like. In addition, as described above, the number of unreported stocks is calculated only once (only when the remaining timer time is 180 seconds), so that the number of hits is notified for the hold stored after that timing. It is possible to provide a silent game property that is not played, and it is possible to provide a stock time effect including the expected degree of the hold for the hold accumulated before the timing.

It should be noted that the timing of the one time is set so as to secure a sufficient time for the four game balls B to enter the second starting port 2004 from the start of the fluctuation to the timing of the one time. Is desirable.

Specifically, for example, the time at which the game ball B is fired is X, and the average time until the fired game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2511 when hitting right is Y. Let Z be the probability that the launched game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 when a right-handed ball is hit when the second starting port 2004 is opened. In this case, for example, the timing of the one time is determined to be Y + (4X / Z) + K (seconds) after the start of fluctuation. However, K is a constant, and is, for example, a margin for a time until the player holds the steering wheel and launches the game ball B.

Further, it is desirable that the timing of the one time is the first half of the fluctuation time. For example, in the above example, if X = 0.6, Y = 5, Z = 0.5, K = 2, the timing of the one time is 5+ (4 × 0.6 / 0) from the start of fluctuation. .5) +2 = 11.8 seconds later. That is, it is desirable that the fluctuation time (that is, 23.6 seconds or more) be selected so that 11.8 seconds is the first half of the fluctuation.

As for the hold charge effect, when the look-ahead is executed at a predetermined timing of the fluctuation in which the hold charge effect is performed, it is desirable that the predetermined timing is set in the same manner. However, as described above, regarding the hold charge effect, if four hold of the second special symbol change is accumulated in the stock time effect, the hold of the second special symbol change is held at the start of the change for executing the hold charge effect. In this case, it is sufficient that three game balls B can be inserted into the second starting port 2004 from the start of the fluctuation to the predetermined timing. That is, the predetermined timing may be defined as Y + (3X / Z) + K (seconds) after the start of the fluctuation. Further, in the hold charge effect, in order to accumulate four hold of the second special symbol change, the fluctuation time in the change in which the hold charge effect is executed needs to be longer than the time until the predetermined timing arrives. .. The same applies when the look-ahead effect is not executed in the hold charge effect.

In the example of FIG. 171, when the number of unreported stocks is 5, the stock effect is performed four times, but the stock effect may be performed five times. When the number of unreported stocks is 5, the stock effect is performed four times, and when four stocks are notified, the hit fluctuation corresponding to the first to fourth fluctuations is the stock time of the fluctuation during the execution. It is assumed that the hit corresponding to the fifth variation is not notified in the stock time production. As a result, not all hits are notified in the stock time production, so that the player's interest is maintained even after the second fluctuation. At the timing of calculating the number of stocks of the first fluctuation, some stored winning information (for example, winning information of special figure 1) is not included in the unreported stock (that is, it is not notified at the stock time). May be.

Further, in the example of FIG. 171, when the number of unreported stocks is 4 or less, the same number of stock effects as the number of unreported stocks is performed. That is, in the example of FIG. 171, one stock is notified by one stock effect, but as described above, a plurality of stocks may be notified by one stock effect. On the contrary, it is not necessary to notify a part or all of the unreported stock until the start of the hit fluctuation. In this case, for example, in the hit fluctuation, an effect of winning a rock-paper-scissors game by reversing may be executed.

If the 1st to 4th fluctuations are lost fluctuations and the 5th fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (however, if the prize corresponding to the 5th fluctuation is performed before the start of the 2nd fluctuation). The number of unreported stocks is one, but the peripheral control MPU treats the number of unreported stocks as zero when referring to the stock time effect block table. In this case, as described above, the dedicated effect straddling from the second variation to the fifth variation is executed, and the hit is notified at the fifth variation.

In the above-mentioned example, the rock-paper-scissors production for 180 seconds of stock time is a production that suggests a hit of the 1st to 5th fluctuations, and the final rock-paper-scissors production is a production that suggests a hit of the 6th to 8th fluctuations. This ratio may be changed. Specifically, for example, the rock-paper-scissors effect of 180 seconds of stock time may be an effect that suggests a hit of the 1st to 4th fluctuations, and the final rock-paper-scissors effect may be an effect that suggests a win of the 5th to 8th fluctuations. The ratio of the hit expectation in the 180-second rock-paper-scissors production of the stock time to the hit expectation in the final rock-paper-scissors production is about 4: 3 in the former, but is about the same as 4: 4 in the latter.

Further, when there are notified stocks and the total of the number of unreported stocks (assumed to be N) and the number of notified stocks is 5, the peripheral control MPU sets the number of unreported stocks to N-1. As a result, the production schedule may be selected from the stock time production block table.

[14-5. Hit by the first special symbol change during the time saving state]
FIG. 173 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a time schedule when a small hit is won by the first special symbol variation corresponding to the winning in the time saving state, and FIG. 173 (B) corresponds to the winning in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time schedule when the big hit is won by the first special symbol change. As mentioned above, the winning of the first special symbol lottery won during the time saving state will not be announced at the stock time. Therefore, when a winner is won in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state, for example, an effect different from the above-mentioned effect is executed in the corresponding first special symbol variation.

Specifically, for example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation corresponding to the winning in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state is 1000 ms. Therefore, in Table A in FIG. 170, the fluctuation time is defined. That is, in the hit fluctuation, the decorative symbol fluctuates for 1000 ms. During this time, no other effect is executed on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the combination of the winning decorative symbols is stopped for 500 ms.

Then, the hit game starts. The operation schedule of each large winning opening and the structure in the large winning opening in the winning game is as described above. The effect executed during the winning of the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state is the same as the effect executed during the winning of the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state, for example.

[14-6. Multiple types of time saving state]
In the above-mentioned example, the end trigger of the time reduction state (that is, the number of times of the time reduction grant) is the same for all the symbols with time reduction, but the end trigger may be different depending on the winning symbol. For example, "Special Figure 1_6R Time Saving Symbol 1", "Special Figure 1_6R Time Saving Symbol 1", "Special Figure 1_7R Time Saving Symbol 1", "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 1", "Special Figure 2_5R Time Saving Symbol 1" , And "Special Figure 2_16R Time Saving Symbol 1" are called Advantageous State Granting Symbol 1, "Special Figure 1_7R Time Saving Symbol 2", "Special Figure 2_15R Time Saving Symbol 1", and "Special Figure 2_16R Time Saving Symbol 2". Will be referred to as the advantageous state granting symbol 2.

Further, the end trigger of the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as the time saving state 1) given by the advantageous state giving symbol 1 is, for example, as described above, the end of the fourth special symbol change after the time saving state starts. , The end of the 8th special symbol fluctuation (that is, the total number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol fluctuation and the 2nd special symbol fluctuation is 8 times) after the start of the time saving state, or the start of the jackpot game, which comes first. It is assumed that That is, the number of times the time saving is given by the advantageous state granting symbol 1 is the smaller of the second special symbol variation of 4 times or the total of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation of 8 times.

Further, the end trigger of the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as time saving state 2) given by the advantageous state giving symbol 2 is, for example, the end of the 100th second special symbol change after the start of the time saving state and the time saving state. It is assumed that the 104th special symbol change (that is, the total number of changes of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change is 104 times) has ended or the jackpot game has started, which is the first to arrive. .. That is, the number of times the time saving state 2 is given is 100 times for the second special symbol variation or 104 times for the total of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, whichever is smaller.

According to the example of FIG. 154, in the second special symbol lottery that can be easily executed in the time saving state, the probability of winning is 11878/65536 (small hit probability 11623/65536 + big hit probability 205/65536). In addition, since the time saving state 2 continues until the second special symbol change is performed up to 100 times, the winning in the second special symbol lottery can be almost certainly won in the time saving state 2. That is, entering the time saving state 2 (that is, winning the advantageous state granting symbol 2) is substantially equivalent to the continuation of the jackpot consecutive villa.

Hereinafter, the fluctuation patterns in each of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 will be described. For example, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the time saving state 1 is set to be 40 seconds at the time of hit fluctuation and 35 seconds at the time of loss fluctuation. However, the last variation of the time saving state 1 (that is, the fourth variation of the second special symbol and the eighth variation (the sum of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation)), which has arrived earlier. ) Is set so that the fluctuation time is 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the loss fluctuation.

The fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the time saving state 1 is set to be, for example, 40 seconds at the time of hit fluctuation and 35 seconds at the time of loss fluctuation. However, the last variation of the time saving state 1 (that is, the fourth variation of the second special symbol and the eighth variation (the sum of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation)), which has arrived earlier. ) Is set so that the fluctuation time is 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the loss fluctuation.

Further, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the time saving state 2 is set to be, for example, 2 seconds or 3 seconds at the time of hit fluctuation and 2 seconds at the time of loss fluctuation. However, the last variation of the time saving state 2 (that is, the 100th second special symbol variation and the 104th variation (the sum of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation), which came first. ) Is set so that the fluctuation time is 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the loss fluctuation as in the time saving state 1.

That is, when the fluctuation time in the time reduction state 1 and the time reduction state 2 is compared, the fluctuation time in the time reduction state 2 is shorter than that in the time reduction state 1 in all the fluctuations except the final fluctuation.

In the time saving state 2, since the fluctuation time is set to be extremely short as compared with the time saving state 1 other than the final fluctuation, a big hit can be generated at an early stage. As a result, it is possible to provide a sense of speed of the jackpot villa. Also, as a player, he understands that entering the time saving state 2 is substantially equivalent to continuing the jackpot. Even if the fluctuation time is long, it is not possible to give the player a sense of expectation, but rather the player may be bored. Therefore, in the time saving state 2, such a short fluctuation time is adopted. Is desirable.

It is assumed that the fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 3 seconds is selected in the hit fluctuation of the time saving state 2, but the selection rate of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is low and the selection rate of the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set high. It is desirable to be there. As a result, even if the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected (although the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is always selected in the loss fluctuation of the time saving state 2 other than the final fluctuation), the player is expected to win in the fluctuation. It is possible to give the player a feeling of exhilaration when a fluctuation time of 3 seconds for which the hit is confirmed is selected.

In the time saving state 2, for example, an early production is executed. For example, even if the ending effect of the big hit game that shifts to the time saving state 2 is completed and the time saving state 2 is entered, the same background as during the big hit game is displayed.

In the early effect, for example, the decorative pattern is changed while the background is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative design is displayed small in an inconspicuous area (for example, the upper right portion) on the effect display device 1600. Further, in the time saving state 2, for example, the remaining number of times of the time saving is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, in the state where the remaining number of time reductions is a predetermined number or less (for example, 4 times or less), the remaining number of time reductions may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 even in the time reduction state 2.

Further, this early effect continues, for example, until the start of the first fluctuation of the next time saving state 1 or the fluctuation immediately before the final fluctuation of the time saving state 2. In addition, when a big hit or a small hit that is not given the time saving state 2 is won in the time saving state 2, during the big hit game, or during the small hit game and during the big hit game that is won via the small hit. On the effect display device 1600, the same background as the big hit game to which the time saving state 2 for starting the early effect is given is displayed, and the early effect continues. Further, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed during the early production may be displayed as the total of the number of rounds of the jackpot game to which the time saving state 2 for starting the early production is given.

Therefore, in the time saving state 2, the early effect can be executed beyond the maximum number of fluctuations that can be held. Further, by these effects, it is possible to realize an effect in which the big hit game continues from the start of the big hit game that first entered the time saving state 2 to the end of the early effect. In addition, the early production is executed during the big hit game that triggers the transition to the time saving state 2, the early production is continuously displayed even at the ending time of the jackpot game, and the early production is continued even if the time saving state 2 is shifted. And display it.

Even if the fluctuation is interrupted, the early production will continue to be displayed. When the fluctuation is interrupted and a predetermined time elapses, the early production is terminated, and a production different from the early production (for example, a production that concretely shows the current state, such as "It is in an advantageous state now") is performed. It may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even when such a different effect appears, it is preferable to continue the right-handed display.

In both the time-saving state 1 and the time-saving state 2, the fluctuation time is set to 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the loss fluctuation, but the same effect is produced in both the time-saving state 1 and the time-saving state 2. You may do it. For example, the above-mentioned hold charge effect is an example of the same effect.

[14-7. Production at the end of final rock-paper-scissors production]
The production performed at the end of the final rock-paper-scissors production will be described below. FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the final rock-paper-scissors production. (X') is a continuation of FIG. 166 (W'). That is, (X') is a state in the middle of the eighth variation (from the start of the time reduction to the special figure 2). However, the fluctuation in (X') is assumed to be an out-of-range fluctuation. Since FIG. 175 (X') is the same as FIG. 167 (X'), the description thereof will be omitted.

(Y ″) is a continuation state of (X ″) in FIG. 175, which is the eighth variation of the special figure 2 which is an out-of-bounds variation. After the continuous striking of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted (that is, after the central pressing operation unit 303a becomes effective), one of the predetermined number of times of pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the elapse of a predetermined time is satisfied. At that point, the state transitions to the (Y'') state. In (Y ″), the production of losing the rock-paper-scissors game is being executed. Further, the value of the gauge displayed on the effect display device 1600 remains and is not 0.

(Z ″) is the state at the end of the 8th fluctuation of the special figure 2 (continuation of (Y ″)), which is an out-of-bounds fluctuation. On the effect display device 1600, a message (“final rock-paper-scissors end ...” in the figure) indicating that the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and the final rock-paper-scissors effect is completed is displayed.

(A ″ ″) is a state in which the eighth variation of the special figure 2 which is an out-of-bounds variation is completed. The effect display device 1600 receives a message prompting the player to launch the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 (so-called left-handed execution) (“Please return to left-handed” in the figure) and left-handed execution. The pattern of the arrow urging is displayed. At the time when the fourth variation of the special figure 2 is completed, the time saving state is finished, but at that time, the display prompting the execution of these left-handed strokes is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for the first time.

That is, in the 5th to 8th fluctuations of the special figure 2, the time saving state has already ended and returned to the normal state, but in these fluctuations, a display prompting the execution of left-handed movement is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It has not been. Since these fluctuations, which are the fluctuations of the special figure 2, are fluctuations with high expectation of hitting, the player stops the launch of the game ball B by not displaying the display instructing how to hit on the effect display device 1600. You can concentrate on the production with high expectations.

However, when the right-handed strike is executed in the 5th to 8th fluctuations of the special figure 2, a display prompting the execution of the left-handed strike or a display prompting the cancellation of the right-handed strike may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is because if a player who misunderstands that the time saving state is continuing and continues to hit right, the number of balls to be ejected will decrease, which is disadvantageous to the player. Specifically, for example, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 (or the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B can enter only when hitting right) a predetermined number of times (for example, once), or the handle 182 When it rotates by a predetermined angle or more, it is determined that the right-handed hit has been executed.

Although the details will be described later, the time saving state ends when the fourth movement of the special figure 2 is completed, and the holding of the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is two or three, and the holding is supported. If all the fluctuations are out of alignment, the final rock-paper-scissors production ends without winning at the 6th or 7th fluctuation. Similarly, in this case as well, a display prompting the execution of left-handed movement is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the end of the variation in which the final rock-paper-scissors effect ends.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the time saving state ends when the fourth variation of the special figure 2 ends, and there is no hold of the special figure 2 or the hold of the special figure 2 at the end of the fourth variation of the special figure 2. If there is only one out-of-range fluctuation, the stock time production ends without executing the final rock-paper-scissors production. In this case, the fluctuation at which the stock time production ends (that is, the 4th fluctuation when there is no reservation in Special Figure 2 and the 5th fluctuation when there is only one out-of-hold fluctuation in Special Figure 2). After the end, a display prompting the execution of left-handed stroke is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[14-8. Production during big hit game]
176 and 177 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect during the big hit game. In (A), the jackpot game starts, and the jackpot opening production starts. (B) is a state during the jackpot opening production. In (B), there is a right-handed display that prompts the player to hit the game ball B into the second prize opening 2006 by making a so-called right-handed (a large arrow with "right-handed !!" in the figure). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “right-handed display (large)”) and is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600.

(C) is a state in which the opening effect of the jackpot has been completed and the first round of the jackpot has started. The right-handed display (large) is erased from the effect display device 1600 by the end of the opening effect. In (C), at the lower part of the effect display device 1600, there is a right-handed display urging the game ball B to enter the second major winning opening 2006 (in the figure, "right-handed !!" is described for each. Multiple arrows lined up in the horizontal direction, hereinafter, the display consisting of these multiple arrows is also referred to as "right-handed display (middle)").

Further, in (C), in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, there is a right-handed display prompting the game ball B to enter the second big winning opening 2006 (in the figure, "right-handed !!" One of the described arrows, hereinafter also referred to as "right-handed display (small)") is displayed. It is assumed that the display area of the effect display device 1600 is larger in the order of right-handed display (large), right-handed display (middle), and right-handed display (small).

The main control MPU constantly turns on the right-handed notification lamp during the period in which the right-handed player is executed and the game is advanced, such as during the big hit game, during the small hit game, and during the time saving state. The right-handed notification lamp is provided, for example, in the function display unit 1400 or at a position visible to the player on a board that can be controlled based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

When the period starts, the main control MPU turns on the right-handed notification lamp and transmits a control signal indicating that the period has started to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU displays a right-handed display (for example, at least one of right-handed display (large), right-handed display (medium), and right-handed display (small)) on the effect display device 1600 according to the control signal. .. Further, when the period ends, the main control MPU ends the lighting of the right-handed notification lamp, and transmits a control signal indicating that the period has ended to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU erases all right-handed displays from the effect display device 1600 according to the control signal.

That is, during the period, the right-handed notification lamp is always lit, and at least one right-handed display is always displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, for example, the peripheral control MPU may synchronize the right-handed display (small) with the right-handed notification lamp by constantly displaying the right-handed display (small) on the effect display device 1600 during the period.

(D) is a state in which the final round of the jackpot is being executed. The right-handed display (middle) and the right-handed display (small) have been displayed since the start of the first round. At the same time as the start of the final round, the stock time challenge rock-paper-scissors production has started, and the opening production of the stock time challenge rock-paper-scissors production is being executed. In the stock time challenge rock-paper-scissors production, if you win the rock-paper-scissors game, you will enter a time-saving state after the big hit, that is, you will be in a state where you can execute the stock time production. On the other hand, in the stock time challenge rock-paper-scissors production, if the rock-paper-scissors game is defeated, it returns to the normal state after the jackpot ends, that is, the stock time production becomes infeasible.

In other words, the stock-time rock-paper-scissors production is a production that announces whether the jackpot being executed is a jackpot with a time reduction or a jackpot without a time reduction. In addition, since the big hit via the small hit and the big hit won in Special Figure 2 are all big hits with a short time, it is desirable that the stock time rock-paper-scissors production is performed in the big hit that does not go through the small hit won in Special Figure 1. ..

(E) is a continuation of (D) during the final round of the jackpot. A rock-paper-scissors effect is performed on the effect display device 1600, and an effect in which a ally character is defeated by rock-paper-scissors is displayed. (F) is a continuation of (E) during the final round of the jackpot. Since the ally character was defeated by the rock-paper-scissors production, the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed on the production display device 1600. In other words, it was announced that the jackpot during execution was a jackpot with no time reduction.

FIG. 177 (G) shows a state in which the ending effect of the jackpot is being performed. In the big hit ending effect, the right-handed display (middle) is erased from the effect display device 1600, but the right-handed display (small) is continuously displayed. (H) is a state in which the jackpot has ended, the state has returned to the normal state, and the pending fluctuation of the special figure 1 has started. Left-handed display that prompts the player to hit the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 after the big hit (two arrows marked "left-handed" in the figure and the characters "Please return to left-handed") Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined time.

[14-8. Special cases for hold charge production and final rock-paper-scissors production]
Hereinafter, special cases in the hold charge production and the final rock-paper-scissors production will be described. As described above, in the hold charge effect, the game ball B is urged to enter the second starting port 2004 until the number of holds in Special Figure 2 is maximized (4). It may not be possible to store the maximum number of holds. Hereinafter, the effect executed in such a case will be described.

FIG. 178 shows that no hold of special figure 2 is accumulated by the end of the change (that is, the end of the time saving state) in which the hold charge effect is executed (the fourth change in special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in the case of. As described above, the fluctuation in which the hold charge effect is executed is an out-of-order fluctuation. (A) indicates a state in which the hold charge effect has started. In this state, there is no hold of special figure 2. Further, the right-handed display (middle) and the right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(B) shows the state of the fluctuation after the lapse of a predetermined time. During the fluctuation, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the hold charge effect, the hold of the special figure 2 is one or less (that is, there is no hold of the change of the special figure 2 for the sixth time from the start of the time saving state). (When the final rock-paper-scissors effect cannot be executed), a hold failure display indicating that the hold of special figure 2 could not be stored is displayed on the effect display device 1600, such as "Charge failure ..." in the figure. .. Since the time saving state is changing and the hold of the special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum, both the right-handed display (middle) and the right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the state where the hold of the special figure 2 is accumulated to the maximum, the right-handed display (middle) may be erased from the effect display device 1600 even in the time saving state.

(C) shows the state at the end of the fluctuation. A combination of out-of-order decorative patterns is displayed. As described above, the hold charge effect is executed at the fourth variation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. Further, when the variation of the special figure 2 is executed four times after the start of the time saving state, the time saving state ends. Therefore, all the right-handed displays are erased from the effect display device 1600. (D) shows the state after the end of the fluctuation. Since the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been restored, the left-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined time.

In FIG. 179, the hold of the second special figure 2 is accumulated immediately before the end of the fluctuation (the fourth change of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state) in which the hold charge effect is executed (that is, immediately before the end of the time saving state). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in the case of. (A) indicates a state in which the hold charge effect has started. In this state, there is only one hold of special figure 2. Further, the right-handed display (middle) and the right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(B) shows the state of the fluctuation after the lapse of a predetermined time. During the fluctuation, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the hold charge effect, since there is only one hold in FIG. 2, the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as in FIG. 178 (B). NS. Other indications are the same as in FIG. 178 (B).

(C') indicates a state in which the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 during the fluctuation and after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The ball is a ball that corresponds to the sixth change in the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. (D') indicates the state at the end of the fluctuation. A combination of out-of-order decorative patterns is displayed. Since the time saving state has ended, all the right-handed displays have been erased from the effect display device 1600.

(E') is a state in which the fifth variation of the special figure 2 which is an out-of-bounds variation has been completed. As described above, when the fifth variation of the special figure 2 is an out-of-bounds variation, the variation time is 1 second, no special effect is performed, and the combination of the decorative symbols off is stopped at the effect display device 1600. .. Further, even in the fluctuation, the hold failure display is still displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(F') is a state in which the sixth variation of the special figure 2 has started. In this way, if there is a ball input corresponding to the sixth variation of the special figure 2 after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the resurrection effect is executed at the start of the sixth variation. In the example of (F'), the line "Not finished yet !!" is displayed on the production display device 1600, and then the final rock-paper-scissors production starts as in FIG. 165 (P').

In addition, for example, when a winning prize is won in the ordinary symbol lottery just before the end of the fourth variation of the special figure 2, the opening of the second starting port 2004 and the entry of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 are the relevant. It may occur just before the end of the fluctuation, or immediately after the end of the fluctuation (ie, immediately after the end of the time saving state).

If the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and before the start of the fifth variation of the special figure 2, 5 of the special figure 2 The revival effect may be executed at the fluctuation point, and the final rock-paper-scissors effect may be started at the same time as the start of the sixth variation of the special figure 2. Further, after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more remains until the end of the fourth variation of the special figure 2, the game ball is inserted in the second starting port 2004. When B enters the ball, the revival effect is executed by the end of the 4th variation of the special figure 2, and the 5th variation of the special figure 2 performs the same effect as (E) (however, the hold failure display is displayed). Is erased from the effect display device 1600), and the final rock-paper-scissors effect may be started at the same time as the start of the sixth variation of the special figure 2.

Further, after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more remains until the end of the fourth variation of the special figure 2, the hold of the special figure 2 is maximum (for example). When up to 4) are accumulated, for example, in the 4th variation of Special Figure 2, the hold failure display and the right-handed display (middle) are deleted from the effect display device 1600 to indicate that the hold has been accumulated to the maximum. A display (for example, a display similar to that shown in FIG. 165 (N')) may be displayed.

In the example of FIG. 179, since there is no hold of the change of the special figure 2 at the start of the sixth change of the special figure 2, the final rock-paper-scissors effect is performed using only the sixth change of the special figure 2. That is, the result of the rock-paper-scissors game in the final rock-paper-scissors production is determined based only on the winning result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the sixth variation of the special figure 2. When the final rock-paper-scissors production is performed using only the 6th variation of special figure 2, the display indicating that the first rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production as shown in FIG. "1st battle !!") may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, but since there is no hold of the special figure 2, the display performed by the 8th variation of the special 2 when the hold charge effect is successful, that is, It is preferable that the display (“final game !!”) indicating that the final rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production starts as shown in FIG. 166 (W') is displayed on the production display device 1600.

In addition, if there are two holdings of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 at the end of the fifth change of the special figure 2, the final rock-paper-scissors production is performed as a continuous production using the sixth and seventh fluctuations of the special figure 2. Is done. That is, based on the winning result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the 6th and 7th fluctuations of Special Figure 2, the winning, losing, and Aiko of the rock-paper-scissors game in the final rock-paper-scissors production in the 6th and 7th fluctuations are determined. NS.

When the final rock-paper-scissors production is performed using the 6th and 7th fluctuations of Special Figure 2, the first rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production as shown in Fig. 166 (T') starts at the 7th fluctuation of Special Figure 2. A display indicating that the function is to be performed (“Round 2 !!” in the figure) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, but since the special figure 2 is not already held, the special 2 when the hold charge effect is successful. The display performed by the 8th variation of the above, that is, the display indicating that the final rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production starts (“final game !!”) as shown in FIG. It is preferable that it is displayed.

If the normal symbol lottery is won just before the end of the time saving state, the opening of the second starting port 2004 starts just before the end of the time saving state, but special figure 2 after the final opening of the second starting port 2004 is completed. It is desirable that the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 and the stop time of the symbol are determined so that the fifth variation of the above is started. When the second starting port 2004 is opened after the start of the fifth variation of the special figure 2, the variation of the special figure 2 from the start of the time saving state (as described above, the small hit probability is set high in the special figure 2). This is because it may be executed 9 times or more, which may increase the burden on the hall.

Specifically, the normal symbol lottery is performed in a short time, the normal lottery result is the result of opening the second starting port 2004 (winning result), and the state in which the normal lottery result is obtained is not the time saving state. In the case of the normal state, it is preferable to use the opening pattern when the hit result is obtained in the normal state, not the opening pattern which is opened when the hit result is obtained during the time saving state. ..

Even if the winning probability in the normal state is set to 0 (that is, even if the normal symbol lottery is performed in the normal state, the winning probability is never won), the burden on the hall is significantly prevented from increasing. Prepare an open pattern that is difficult to win. The normal symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state, the normal lottery result is the result of opening the second starting port 2004 (winning result), and the state in which the normal lottery result is obtained is not the time saving state but the normal state. In such a case, it is preferable to execute an opening pattern in which it is extremely difficult to win a prize, thereby eliminating as much as possible the fluctuation of FIG. 2 from the start of the time saving state to be executed 9 times or more. An open pattern in which it is extremely difficult to win a prize is a time shorter than the open pattern (for example, less than 1 second or 0) when a normal symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state and a winning result is obtained during the time saving state. .008 seconds etc.) etc.

In this chapter, the special lottery results up to the 4th change in Special Figure 2 will be announced in principle by the stock time production in the 1st change in Special Figure 2, but for example, each change in Special Figure 2 The special lottery result corresponding to the change may be announced in. Specifically, for example, in each fluctuation (1st to 8th fluctuations) of Special Figure 2, a rock-paper-scissors game is produced, and the winner of the special lottery result of the change is announced according to the result of the game.

In this case, for example, at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game effect in the Nth variation of the special figure 2 (N is an integer of 1 or more and 8 or less), a display indicating that the variation is the Nth variation of the special figure 2 (for example, "No. 1" "N battle !!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, a display indicating that it is the final change of the special figure 2 at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production in the change of the special figure 2 after the fifth change and the change without the hold of the special figure 2 at the start of the change. (For example, "final battle !!") may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, as described above, since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 can be executed up to eight times in the time saving state, at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production in the Nth fluctuation of the special figure 2 (N is an integer of 1 or more and 8 or less), A display indicating that there are remaining (9-N) rock-paper-scissors games (for example, "(9-N) game !!") may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In the case of such a display, if the maximum number of holds (4) in Special Figure 2 is not accumulated at the end of the time saving state, the actual number of remaining fluctuations in Special Figure 2 until the end of the time saving state and rock-paper-scissors There is a discrepancy between the display of "Remaining (9-N) battle !!" displayed at the start of the game.

For example, if the hold of special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum by the end of the time saving state, the display at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game effect after the fifth variation may be modified. Specifically, for example, "5 remaining races !!" is displayed at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game of the 4th variation of Special Figure 2, but if there are 2 holds of Special Figure 2 at the end of the time saving state, At the start of the 5th variable rock-paper-scissors game production of Special Figure 2, "2 remaining races !!", and at the start of the 6th variable rock-paper-scissors game production of Special Figure 2, "1 race remaining !!" ("Final race !!" May be), is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this case, the disappearance effect in which the number of remaining rock-paper-scissors games disappears at the start of the fifth variation of the rock-paper-scissors game effect in Special Figure 2 may be executed. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned example, since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed only twice less than the maximum number, the image of the two hands of the ally is once displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the disappearance effect. After that, erase it. Further, in the disappearance effect in the above-described example, an effect may be performed in which the display of "remaining 2 battles !!" is corrected immediately after displaying "remaining 4 battles !!" on the effect display device 1600. In this case, for example, the display of "4 remaining races !!" may be made semi-transparent or blurred.

In addition, the disappearance effect and the normal rock-paper-scissors game effect may be executed in parallel. Specifically, for example, one of the disappearance effect and the normal rock-paper-scissors game effect is displayed semi-transparently, or the display areas of the disappearance effect and the normal effect are displayed so as not to overlap, so that the disappearance effect and the normal effect can be displayed. Make both visible. Further, after executing the disappearance effect, the normal rock-paper-scissors game effect may be executed.

Further, for example, if the hold of the special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum by the end of the time saving state, the display at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game effect of the final change of the special figure 2 may be modified. Specifically, for example, when the 4th variable rock-paper-scissors game production of Special Figure 2 starts, "5 remaining races !!" is displayed, but when the time saving state ends, there are 2 reservations of Special Figure 2. , "4 remaining races !!" at the start of the 5th variable rock-paper-scissors game production of Special Figure 2, "1 race remaining !!" at the start of the 6th variable rock-paper-scissors game production of Special Figure 2 ("Final race !!" May be), is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the above-mentioned disappearance effect may be executed at the start of the sixth variation of the special figure 2.

Further, for example, even if the hold of the special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum by the end of the time saving state, it is not necessary to modify the display at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game effect. Specifically, for example, if there are two holdings of special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state, "4 remaining races !!" at the start of the 5th variation of rock-paper-scissors game production of special figure 2, At the start of the 6th variable rock-paper-scissors game production, "3 races remaining !!" is displayed on the production display device 1600. In this case, the above-mentioned disappearance effect may be executed at the end of the sixth variation of the special figure 2, and a display indicating that all the rock-paper-scissors game effects have been completed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, when announcing the special lottery result corresponding to each change in Special Figure 2, the change time corresponding to the hold of Special Figure 2 during the time saving state and after the time saving state ends is shown in FIG. 169. As shown, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time may be selected regardless of whether it is an outlier, a small hit, or a big hit.

[15. Decorative pattern freeze production]
In this chapter, we will explain the freeze effect of decorative patterns. As described above, the main control MPU transmits a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the end of the fluctuation. Further, until the peripheral control MPU receives the stop display command from the main control MPU, the effect display device 1600 is in a state suggesting a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped, but the decorative symbols are not stopped (for example, each decoration). The decorative symbol is stopped (confirmed display) based on the reception of the stop display command (temporary stop state including the shaking fluctuation display) in which the entire symbol is displayed in a shaking manner.

In the final display, if the display position of the decorative symbol as a whole does not move, a part of the decorative symbol changes (for example, the aura worn by the character displayed in the decorative symbol sways, and the character's aura is changed. The limbs may move slightly, etc.).

Further, in the confirmed display state, the peripheral control MPU displays the effect until any one of the big hit start command, the small hit start command, or the next fluctuation determination result notification command (variation start command) is received from the main control MPU. The decorative symbol is kept in the final display state in the device 1600. However, if the peripheral control MPU is in the definite display state immediately after the deviation change and there is no hold for the next change, the effect display device 1600 completely displays the decorative symbol until the waiting time specified in step S194 elapses. It may be maintained in a stopped state (a state in which a part of the decorative symbol described above does not change), and thereafter, the position of the decorative symbol may be displayed in a mode in which a part of the decorative symbol changes although the position does not move.

The decorative pattern freeze effect is an effect in which the final display time is longer than usual, and is executed as a look-ahead effect. In addition, the front light guide plate 2160 emits light according to the selected light emission schedule during the final display time when the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed. It is assumed that the normal fixed display time when the decorative symbol freeze symbol effect is not executed is 500 ms.

FIG. 180 is an example of a fixed display time selection table. The fixed display time selection table defines an effect schedule for realizing the decorative pattern freeze effect. The fixed display time selection table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the main control board 1310. The fixed display time selection table includes, for example, a number field, a fixed display time field, a light emission schedule field, and a distribution field. The number field stores a number that uniquely identifies the record in the fixed display time selection table.

The confirmed display time column stores the confirmed display time. The final display time in the jackpot fluctuation is the time from the time when the stop display command in step S182 is set to the time when the jackpot start command is set in step S187. Further, the fixed display time in the small hit variation is the time from the time when the stop display command in step S182 is set to the time when the small hit start command is set in step S191. Further, the definite display time in the deviation fluctuation is the time from the time when the stop display command in step S182 is set to the end of the waiting time in step S194. In the example of FIG. 180, the fixed display times stored in the fixed display time column are all longer than 500 ms (that is, the normal fixed display time in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed), and are 1000 ms, 2000 ms, or 5000 ms.

The light emission schedule column stores a light emission schedule, that is, a light emission mode of the front light guide plate 2160 in each period during the fixed display time. The distribution column stores the distribution of the fixed display time and the light emission schedule for each type of fluctuation of the pre-judgment target.

For example, the main control MPU executes a lottery using the fixed display time selection table at a predetermined ratio in step S62 of the pre-determination process. Specifically, for example, when it is decided to generate the look-ahead effect at the time of winning the fourth hold, for example, the hold excluding the hold determined to execute the look-ahead effect during the execution of the look-ahead effect. The probability that the decorative symbol freeze effect will occur due to the fluctuation corresponding to any of the first, second, and third hold (that is, the fixed display time selection table is used in step S62 corresponding to the fluctuation). The probability that the lottery was executed) is 1/5 if the hold determined to execute the look-ahead effect (the 4th hold in the above example) is out of order, 1/2 if it is a hit, and so on. , It is preferable to raise the expectation of hit when the decorative pattern freeze effect is executed.

In the lottery, the main control MPU selects the fixed display time and the light emission schedule from the fixed display time selection table based on the winning type and the distribution. In addition, the main control MPU determines the variation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed from the variation during execution and the variation in hold (excluding the variation of the pre-determination target). Further, the main control MPU determines the timing for setting the big hit start command or the small hit start command, or the waiting time in step S194, based on the selected confirmed display time.

Further, the main control MPU includes the information indicating the fluctuation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed and the selected light emission schedule in the pre-judgment command and notifies the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU notifies the peripheral control MPU of the notified light emission schedule. The front light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light according to the above.

Note that the fixed display time selection table may store only the fixed display time and the distribution of the fixed display time for each type of hit. In this case, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 stores information indicating the light emission schedule for each fixed display time and the distribution of the light emission schedule. That is, in this case, the main control MPU notifies the peripheral control MPU of the information indicating the fluctuation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed and the selected fixed display time, and the peripheral control MPU sets the notified fixed display time. Based on this, the light emission schedule is selected.

In the example of FIG. 180, the distribution is defined so that a longer fixed display time can be easily selected in the order of out-of-order fluctuation <small hit fluctuation <big hit fluctuation. Further, as the light emitting mode of the front light guide plate 2160, the light emitting schedule and the distribution are defined so that the expected degree is blue <green <red, and the higher the number of times of light emission is, the higher the expected degree is. That is, for example, the selectivity of the light emission mode with low expectation is lower in the small hit fluctuation than in the out-of-range fluctuation, and in the large hit fluctuation than in the small hit fluctuation, the selectivity of the light emission mode with high expectation is higher. The light emission schedule and distribution are set so that the number of light emissiones is large.

Further, in the example of FIG. 180, in all the light emission schedules, the front light guide plate 2160 is set not to emit light (no light emission) in the period of 0 to 500 ms from the start of the final display. On the other hand, as described above, the normal fixed display time in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed is 500 ms. Further, in the above-described example, since the decorative symbol freeze effect as the look-ahead effect does not affect the effect during the decorative symbol change, the player cannot anticipate the occurrence of the decorative symbol freeze effect. Therefore, the player can know that the decorative symbol freeze effect is being executed only when the final display time exceeds 500 ms, and the expectation can be sharply increased.

On the other hand, the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect for suggesting or foretelling the appearance of the decorative symbol freeze effect may be executed. In the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect, for example, the front light guide plate 2160 emits light. Further, in the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect, for example, a meter and a line saying "Exceed the limit!" Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a mode in which the meters are accumulated is displayed.

In the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect, if the meter value rises to the maximum value of the meter, the process shifts to the decorative symbol freeze effect, and if the meter value does not rise to the maximum value of the meter even after a predetermined time has passed, the decoration is performed. Execute another effect or end the fluctuation without shifting to the symbol freeze effect.

The meter may be displayed on the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, but it is desirable that the meter is displayed so that at least a part of the decorative symbol is visible. By displaying in this way, the player not only pays attention to the meter, but also can directly see and enjoy the decorative symbol when the movement of the decorative symbol stops by making the decorative symbol visible. .. That is, the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect is an effect performed while the decorative symbol fluctuates.

For example, the light emitting time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative symbol freeze effect and the light emitting time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect are the same. Since the light emission times are the same, the player who sees the light emission in the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect can easily associate the decorative symbol freeze effect.

On the other hand, the light emitting time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative symbol freeze effect may be longer than the light emitting time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect. Since the light emission time of the decorative symbol freeze effect is longer, the expectation can be further increased in the decorative symbol freeze effect than in the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect. Further, the light emitting time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative symbol freeze effect may be shorter than the light emitting time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect. Since the light emitting time of the decorative symbol freeze effect is shorter, the player's sense of tension can be gradually increased before the decorative symbol freeze effect is entered.

By executing the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect, the player can anticipate the execution of the decorative symbol freeze effect, which in turn gradually raises the expectation, so that the player is suddenly given an excessive sense of tension. There is no. In addition, in the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect, other light emitters such as a lamp provided on the door frame 3 and a lamp provided on various operation units may emit light in place of or in addition to the front light guide plate 2160.

Further, the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect may be performed a plurality of times by one special symbol variation. For example, a pattern in which a decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect occurs before and after reach occurs, a pattern in which a decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect occurs multiple times before reach occurs, and a pattern in which a decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect occurs multiple times after reach occurs. Decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect There may be a pattern that occurs.

When the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times with one variation, for example, the lengths of the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects may all be the same or may be different. Since the lengths of the multiple decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects are all the same, the player can predict the end timing of the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect, so that the decorative symbol freeze effect can be produced without being overly tense. You can wait for the appearance. In addition, since the player cannot predict the end timing of the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect due to the existence of the plurality of decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects having different lengths, at the end of the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect. It can surprise the player.

Further, when the decorative freeze suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times with one variation, for example, the length of the longest time among the plurality of decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects is shorter than the length of the decorative symbol freeze effect. .. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player in the decorative symbol freeze effect more than in each decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect. On the other hand, the length of the longest time among the plurality of decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects may be longer than the length of the decorative symbol freeze effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the tension of the player in the longest decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect.

Further, when the decorative freeze suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times with one variation, for example, the length of the shortest time among the plurality of decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects is shorter than the length of the decorative symbol freeze effect. .. As a result, the player's sense of tension is not excessively increased in the shortest decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect. On the other hand, the length of the shortest time among the plurality of decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects may be longer than the length of the decorative symbol freeze effect. As a result, while increasing the tension of each decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect over time, the special lottery result is immediately notified in the decorative symbol freeze effect, and the tension heightened by the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect is released at once. be able to.

Further, when the decorative freeze suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times with one variation, for example, the total time of the plurality of decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects is shorter than the length of the decorative symbol freeze effect. As a result, it is possible for the player to spend more time on the decorative symbol freeze effect after the decorative symbol freeze effect is smoothly progressed a plurality of times, so that the player can raise the expectation in the decorative symbol freeze effect. On the other hand, the total time of the plurality of decorative symbol freeze suggestion effects may be longer than the length of the decorative symbol freeze effect. As a result, while increasing the tension over time for the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect multiple times, the special lottery result is immediately notified in the decorative pattern freeze effect, and the tension increased by the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect. It can be unraveled at once.

The meter effect may be performed during the decorative pattern freeze effect. When the meter effect is performed during the decorative pattern effect, for example, the value of the meter is selected so that the value of the meter indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, the light emission schedule of the number N in the definite display time selection table of FIG. 180 is such that the front light guide plate 2160 emits light in the order of no light emission in the first 500 ms and blue, green, and red in 500 to 2000 ms, and 2000 ms to 2000 ms. There is no light emission at 3500 ms, and the front light guide plate 2160 emits light again in the light emission pattern from 3500 ms to 5000 ms. That is, in the light emission schedule of No. N, the light emission of the front light guide plate 2160 according to the same light emission pattern loops with a period of no light emission. In addition, the light emission schedule is selected only for the decorative symbol freeze effect corresponding to the hit fluctuation or the small hit fluctuation. As a result, when the front light guide plate 2160 emits light with a specific light emission schedule having regularity, the hit is fixed, so that the player can feel an uplifting feeling.

The amount of light (light emission intensity) of the front light guide plate 2160 can be adjusted by the player during the period during which the front light guide plate 2160 for the decorative symbol freeze effect can emit light (that is, after 500 ms after the start of the final display). Is desirable. Specifically, for example, during the period, rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right increases the amount of light, and rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the left decreases the amount of light. In accordance with this adjustment, a light emitting body different from the front light guide plate 2160 (for example, a light emitting body attached to a frame such as a door frame 3, a light emitting body attached to a movable body on the game panel 1100 side, or a game). The amount of light of the light emitting body (light emitting body that emits light on the rolling surface of the sphere B) may also be changed.

Even if the central pressing operation unit 303a or the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b provided in the center of the rotation operation unit 302 is operated, the light emitting mode such as the amount of light of the light emitting body such as the front light guide plate 2160 does not change. That is, the peripheral control MPU changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting body even if it receives the input signals from the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b during the period when the front light guide plate 2160 during the decorative symbol freeze effect can emit light. Although it is not changed, when the input signal from the rotation operation unit 302 is received, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body is changed.

Further, the rotation operation unit 302, which is an operation unit for changing the light emission mode of the light emitting body during the period when the front light guide plate 2160 during the decorative symbol freeze effect can emit light, and the operation unit whose light emission mode does not change even if operated. The central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are located close to each other. The term "different operating units are located in the vicinity" as used herein means, for example, that the player can touch the different operating units with one hand at the same time (for example, a distance of 2 cm or less). Since these operation units are located in the vicinity, it is not possible for a player who has seen the decorative symbol freeze effect for the first time to easily determine which operation unit should be operated to reduce the amount of light.

In this way, by making it difficult to reduce the amount of light in the decorative symbol freeze effect, it is possible to inform other players who have never seen the existence of the decorative symbol freeze effect, which has a high expectation of a big hit. The player can get a sense of expectation even if the decorative pattern freeze effect is the first appearance in his / her own game after that.

Further, at this time, an index indicating the amount of light after adjustment may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is possible to select to increase the amount of light when it is desired to appeal to the surrounding players that the decorative pattern freeze effect is being performed, and to decrease the amount of light when it is not desired to appeal. In order to increase the tension, it is desirable that no sound is output (silence) during the decorative pattern freeze effect.

The index may be indicated by, for example, the same meter as the meter displayed in the above-mentioned decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect. As a result, although the player has seen the meter in the decorative symbol freeze effect, the player who sees the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect for the first time can see the meter in the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect for the first time. It is possible to notice that is a production related to the decorative pattern freeze production, and it is possible to improve the sense of expectation.

In addition, when the meter is displayed in the decorative symbol freeze suggestion effect that does not develop into the decorative symbol freeze effect, the meter is continued even after the special symbol change is completed in order to maintain the player's expectation for a long time. May be displayed. Further, in order to make sure that the player recognizes that the decorative symbol freeze effect is being executed, the meter may be erased during the period of 0 to 500 ms of the decorative symbol freeze effect when there is no light emission.

In the example of FIG. 180, the light emitting schedule of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative symbol freeze effect is defined, but another light emitting body may emit light in the decorative symbol freeze effect. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol freeze effect, the light emission of a combination of the front light guide plate 2160 and the lamp provided on the door frame 3 may be performed. Hereinafter, the lamp provided on the door frame 3 is also referred to as a door frame lamp. The door frame lamp includes, for example, a lamp (LED) provided on the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, the handle unit 180, the dish decoration unit 250, and the like.

For example, if the light emission schedule is such that the front light guide plate 2160, the door frame top unit 450, and the dish decoration unit 250 emit light in this order, the player's line of sight moves in the order of front center, front upper, front lower, following these light emission. Therefore, in the decorative symbol freeze effect, the player can enjoy the effect without breathing even after the decorative symbol freezes.

Further, the decorative symbol freeze effect is, for example, a mode in which only the front light guide plate 2160 emits light (hereinafter, also referred to as light emission mode 1), or a mode in which the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp emit light (hereinafter, light emission mode 2). (Also also referred to as light emission mode), and a mode in which only the door frame lamp emits light (hereinafter, also referred to as light emission mode 3) may be executed. At this time, for example, it is desirable that the selection rate of each light emitting mode for each special lottery result is determined so that the jackpot expectation increases in the order of light emitting mode 1 <light emitting mode 2 <light emitting mode 3.

Further, the light emission in a plurality of light emission modes among the light emission mode 1, the light emission mode 2, and the light emission mode 3 may be performed by one decorative symbol freeze effect. Specifically, for example, the light emission schedule includes a schedule consisting of only light emission mode 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as schedule 1), a schedule for light emission in light emission mode 2 after light emission mode 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as schedule 2), and a light emission mode. A schedule for emitting light in the light emitting mode 2 after the light emitting mode 1 and then in the light emitting mode 3 (hereinafter, also referred to as a schedule 3) is included.

In Schedule 1, the front light guide plate 2160 emits light and the decorative pattern freeze effect ends. In Schedule 2, after the front light guide plate 2160 emits light, the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp emit light, that is, a series of effects in which the light of the front light guide plate 2160 spreads throughout the gaming machine are executed to produce a decorative symbol freeze effect. finish. In Schedule 3, after the front light guide plate 2160 emits light, the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp emit light, and then the door frame lamp emits light. That is, in Schedule 3, a series of effects are executed in which the light of the front light guide plate 2160 spreads over the entire gaming machine, and then the light of the entire gaming machine bursts and scatters to the door frame lamp which is the outer frame of the gaming machine. Freeze production ends.

Therefore, the schedule 1, the schedule 2, and the schedule 3 are executed up to the first stage of the light emitting effect that develops stepwise, the light emitting effect executed up to the second stage, and the third stage, respectively. Since it can be considered as a light emission effect, it is desirable that the selection rate of each schedule for each special lottery result is set so that the expectation of big hits increases in the order of schedule 1 <schedule 2 <schedule 3.

It is desirable that a period of no light emission for a predetermined time is provided without ending the decorative symbol freeze immediately after the light emission of the light emission mode 1 of the schedule 1 and the light emission of the light emission mode 2 of the schedule 2. Further, it is desirable that a period of no light emission for a predetermined time is provided between each light emission mode in Schedule 2 and Schedule 3. As a result, the player can watch the decorative pattern freeze effect while feeling nervous about whether or not the light emitting mode develops during the period when there is no light emission.

Further, at the same time as the light emission in the light emission mode 3 in the schedule 3, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the central pressing operation unit 303a, the rotation operation unit 302, etc.) that can be operated by the player may be made to emit light (that is, a decorative symbol). A predetermined operation unit that can be operated by the player emits light after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the freeze effect). It should be noted that the light emitting effect of the operation unit in the schedule 3 may be made to emit light only when the special conditions are satisfied. As a special condition, for example, it is selected only when the special lottery result of the change of the look-ahead target is a big hit, and the appearance rate is extremely low compared to other productions (for example, within a predetermined number of all productions (for example, the fifth). It is desirable that it is a so-called premium production (within) that the appearance rate is low). In this case, when the operation unit is operated, the emission color of the operation unit changes to rainbow color, and the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp may also emit light in rainbow color. This makes it possible to strongly remind the player that he has won a big hit.

In addition, in the light emitting effect of the operation unit in Schedule 3, the selection rate when the special lottery result is out of order is extremely low as compared with other light emitting effects, and the selection rate in the case of a big hit is compared with other light emitting effects. It may be a so-called intensely hot production that is not low (this is also an example of the above-mentioned special conditions). In the super hot production, when the operation unit is operated when the special lottery result is a big hit, for example, the same light emission production as the premium production described above is performed. Further, in the super hot production, if the operation unit is operated when the special lottery result is out of order, for example, the light emission of the operation unit is turned off, and the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp are also turned off. NS.

Further, in the light emitting effect of the operation unit of the light emitting mode 3 of the schedule 3, when the operation unit is operated, a predetermined effect may be executed. It is desirable that the predetermined production is a special production that cannot be produced based on the special lottery. This is because in the light emitting mode 3, only the door frame emits light, which strongly attracts the attention of the player who is unaware of the light emission. As the special effect, for example, a predetermined sound may be output from the speaker. The predetermined sound is, for example, an announcement sound indicating that the decorative symbol freeze effect is still continuing. Further, the special effect is executed in the light emission effect of the operation unit of the light emission mode 3 of the schedule 3, at the timing when the operation unit is emitting light or immediately before the light emission, that is, before the operation unit is operated. May be good.

In the above-mentioned example, the example in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed as the look-ahead effect has been described, but the decorative symbol is used as a normal effect other than the look-ahead effect (that is, an effect showing a special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation during execution). A freeze effect may be performed.

However, in this case, the peripheral control MPU reminds the player that even if the big hit and the small hit fluctuate during the final display period of the decorative symbol freeze effect, the player is out of the decorative symbols (out of the three decorative symbols). At least one is different from the other two), and in a predetermined period (for example, for 500 ms) immediately before the end of the confirmation display period, for example, a lamp that emits light only at the time of winning (for example, a confirmation lamp) is emitted, or at the time of hit. It announces that it is a hit by outputting a line indicating that it is present from various speakers. On the other hand, in the case of an out-of-order fluctuation, the decorative symbol that reminds the player of the out-of-order is stopped and the hit notification is not made during the final display period. By executing the decorative symbol freeze effect in the normal effect other than the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest that the variation may be a hit variation to the player who is disappointed because he / she thinks that the variation is an out-of-order variation. It can give a sharp uplifting feeling.

In addition, when the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed as a normal effect other than the look-ahead effect (that is, an effect showing a special lottery result corresponding to the change during execution), the change in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed is specific. The rate at which the combination of decorative symbols is stopped may be set higher than the variation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed. As the combination of the specific decorative symbols, for example, there is a combination in which all the decorative symbols are odd or even. In addition, the special decorative symbol described as "freeze" may be stopped. The dedicated symbol is a symbol that is not displayed when the special symbol is stopped due to a special symbol change. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the larger the number of the dedicated decorative symbols among the three decorative symbols to be stopped, the higher the expectation that the decorative symbol freeze effect will occur. By stopping the combination of decorative symbols such as these, the player can expect the occurrence of the subsequent decorative symbol freeze effect even though the out-of-order fluctuating decorative symbol has stopped.

In addition, when a special decorative symbol described as "freeze" can appear, the decorative symbol freeze effect may be executed only when the dedicated decorative symbol is displayed. That is, in this case, when a specific combination of decorative symbols (combination other than the dedicated decorative symbol) is displayed, the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed. As a result, the player can be clearly expected to start the decorative pattern freeze effect.

In this case, the main control MPU selects the fixed display time and the light emission schedule from the fixed display time selection table based on the hit type and the distribution. If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the selection process is performed immediately after step S132, for example, and if the jackpot flag is not set in step S131, the selection process is performed immediately after step S136, for example. ..

Further, the main control MPU determines the timing for setting the big hit start command or the small hit start command, or the waiting time in step S194, based on the selected confirmed display time. Further, the main control MPU includes the light emission schedule selected from the fixed display time selection table in the determination result notification command in step S137 and notifies the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU notifies the front light guide plate 2610 according to the notified light emission schedule. Make it emit light.

It should be noted that the decorative pattern freeze effect may be changed in the middle. Specifically, for example, when the game ball B enters the start port (first start port 2002 or second start port 2004) during the execution of the decorative symbol freeze effect, a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). You may change the effect of the decorative pattern freeze effect and perform a one-shot notification effect. The one-shot notification effect is an effect of directly and immediately notifying the special lottery result at the start of the effect. In addition, the light emission of the light emitting body such as the front light guide plate 2160, which has been emitting light according to the schedule, is stopped when the effect of the decorative symbol freeze effect is changed.

By making it possible to change the effect of the decorative pattern freeze effect, a player who wants to enjoy the decorative pattern freeze effect for a long time can change the light emission mode without inserting the game ball B into the starting port (which schedule was selected). A player who wants to know the result of the special lottery as soon as possible can insert the game ball B into the starting port to generate a one-shot notification effect.

In addition, when the game ball B enters the starting port during the execution of the decorative symbol freeze effect, the decorative symbol freeze effect is changed with a predetermined probability of less than 1, and a one-shot notification effect is performed (that is, the game ball). Even if the game ball B enters the starting port and the jackpot is not notified, the player maintains a sense of expectation because the special lottery result is not necessarily notified even if B enters the starting port. be able to.

For a player who wants to know the result of the special lottery as soon as possible, it may be possible to select whether or not the effect during the decorative pattern freeze effect is the one-shot notification effect described above.

Further, during the decorative pattern freeze effect, it is desirable that there is no sound in order to enjoy the freezing of the decorative pattern and the light emission of the light emitting body. Further, when the effect of the decorative pattern freeze effect is changed, a predetermined sound may be output. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the decorative pattern freeze effect has been changed. Further, when a predetermined operation unit (for example, the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302) is operated during the execution of the decorative symbol freeze effect, the light emission of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative symbol freeze effect described above is triggered. May end.

Further, in the example of FIG. 180, the effect time of the decorative symbol freeze effect is 5000 ms at the maximum, but there may be a long version of the decorative symbol freeze effect having a longer freeze time. The freeze time in the long version of the decorative symbol freeze effect is longer than, for example, the time of all other special symbol fluctuations. In this case, for example, the schedule for the long version of the decorative symbol freeze effect may include, for example, a schedule in which the illuminant continues to emit light for a time longer than the longest fluctuation time among all other fluctuations.

In addition, the long version of the decorative symbol freeze effect may be selected only when the special lottery result of the variation of the look-ahead target is a big hit. However, in this case, for example, about 1/10 of the appearance of the decorative symbol freeze effect is long so that the player's expectation for the normal decorative symbol freeze effect does not decrease if the long version of the decorative symbol freeze effect frequently appears. It is desirable that the distribution of the production is defined so that it becomes a version.

Further, since the long version of the decorative symbol freeze effect has a particularly long freeze time, it may be possible to change the effect of the decorative symbol freeze effect described above even in the long version.

The decorative symbol freeze effect may be executed only in a specific effect state. Specifically, for example, the decorative symbol freeze effect may be executed only in the non-time saving state. This is to allow the game to proceed smoothly by not executing the decorative symbol freeze effect, which takes a relatively long time as the look-ahead effect, in the time-saving state. Further, for example, it is desirable that the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed in duplicate with, for example, another look-ahead effect. This is because if a look-ahead effect other than the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed at the same time, the player cannot strongly impress the decorative symbol freeze effect. The non-time saving state is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player among a plurality of gaming states such as low probability non-time saving and high probability time saving as the gaming state of the gaming machine.

The visibility of the decorative symbol may be reduced after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol freeze effect. Specifically, for example, the visibility of the decorative symbol is lowered by lowering the brightness and saturation of the decorative symbol itself in the effect display device 1600 or the entire effect display device 1600. By reducing the visibility of the decorative symbol that does not move during the decorative symbol freeze effect, the player's attention can be further focused on the light emission of the light emitter. Further, at this time, the brightness of the light emission of the predetermined light emitting body may be lowered, which can attract the player's attention to the light emission of the front light guide plate 2160. The decorative symbol may be completely invisible after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol freeze effect.

In the example of FIG. 180, regardless of whether the hit type is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, there is a distribution in any of the schedule in which the front light guide plate 2160 emits light and the schedule in which the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light. In the case of hit, the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light, and in the case of off, the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light at the start of the decorative symbol freeze effect. Schedule and distribution so that the front light guide plate 2160 emits light after a predetermined time has elapsed. May be defined.

That is, in this case, since the deviation is determined when the front light guide plate 2160 emits light in the decorative symbol freeze effect, the player watches the progress of the game in the expectation that the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light. ..

As for the schedule in this case, for example, only one pattern common to the big hit and the small hit and one pattern for the miss are prepared. That is, once the special lottery result is decided, the schedule is decided without going through the lottery.

Further, it is desirable that the time for producing the decorative symbol freeze in the case of a big hit or a small hit is set longer than the longest time in which the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light in the case of disconnection. As a result, the hit is confirmed when the longest time elapses from the start of the decorative symbol freeze effect, so that the player can watch the decorative symbol freeze effect with a greater sense of tension.

In the example of FIG. 180, only the front light guide plate 2160 is made to emit light in the decorative symbol freeze effect, but the player may not notice the light emission when only the front light guide plate 2160 is emitted. Therefore, the decorative symbol is emitted. Even if the freeze effect is started, the light emitting mode of the door frame lamp or the like before the start of the decorative pattern freeze effect may be continued to emit light to appeal to the player that the decorative pattern freeze effect has been started.

[16. Judge production]
[16-1. Pre-instruction production]
Hereinafter, the prior instruction effect executed during the judge effect will be described. The judge effect is an effect that announces the result of the special lottery corresponding to the change among the effects executed during the change of the special symbol. FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the prior instruction effect. Hereinafter, the prior instruction effect will be described as being executed in the fluctuation of winning. (A) is a state in which a reach is applied in the jackpot fluctuation. (B) is a state in which the reach production has started. In addition, during the reach production, a rock-paper-scissors game production that is a judge production is performed, and if the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, the rock-paper-scissors production wins, and if the fluctuation is an out-of-range fluctuation, the rock-paper-scissors production loses.

(C) is a state in which the reach is being produced. The effect display device 1600 displays a right-handed display prompting the execution of so-called right-handed stroke in parallel with the judge effect (“rock-paper-scissors ...” in the figure) during the reach effect. During the fluctuation, the second big winning opening 2006 is not open because it is in a normal state, but during the big hit game, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, so that the game is played by executing a right-handed strike. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed display as a prior instruction in the fluctuation in the normal state in this way, it is possible to remind the player that the jackpot game will start after the fluctuation, and the player's expectation for the jackpot can be expected. Will increase.

It is desirable that the right-handed display in the prior instruction effect is different from the right-handed display (the above-mentioned right-handed display (large), etc.) displayed in the big hit game, the small hit game, and the time saving state. If these are the same display, there is a high possibility that the player misidentifies the game state and actually starts right-handed, which in turn reduces the number of balls to be ejected, which is disadvantageous to the player. This is because the possibility is high.

In addition, in the prior instruction effect, in order to strongly associate the big hit with the player, the image of the second big winning opening 2006 may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 together with the right-handed display. Further, in the prior instruction effect, the images of the first winning opening 2005 and the second starting port 2004 may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 together with the right-handed display. This makes it possible for the player to associate a small hit or a time saving state.

(D) is a state during the reach production following (C). When a predetermined time elapses after the right-handed display is displayed, the right-handed display is highlighted in the effect display device 1600 in a more recognizable manner (larger in the drawing). At the same time as the highlighting is performed, a voice prompting right-handedness such as "What are you doing !? Right-handed!" May be output from the speaker. In the example of FIG. 181, the right-handed display has a two-step change of a small right-handed display in (C) and a large right-handed display in (D), but gradually changes through three or more steps. May be highlighted in.

(E) is a state during the reach production following (D). A ally character has won a rock-paper-scissors game against an enemy character. Also in (E), the highlighted right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As shown in (C) to (E), the effect images of the prior instruction effect and the judge effect have a position where both can be visually recognized on the effect display device 1600 (for example, the distance between the center positions of both effect images). It is desirable that it is displayed above the specified value). When the effect images of the first instruction effect and the judge effect are displayed at overlapping positions on the effect display device 1600, the effect image of the first instruction effect is displayed in preference to the effect image of the judge effect (for example, on the front side). Is desirable. In (C) to (E), the light emitting modes of the various light guide plates and the various lamps are not the light emitting modes in the judge effect, but are provided in the light emitting mode (for example, on the right side of the game board) according to the prior instruction effect. It is desirable that the lamp lights up, etc.).

(F) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot has stopped, and a display indicating that the jackpot has been won (“Big hit! Congratulations!” In the figure) is displayed. As in (F), it is desirable that the right-handed display in the prior instruction effect is erased from the effect display device 1600 at the end of the fluctuation.

Even before the end of the fluctuation, for example, the game ball B makes a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) the gate portion 2003 (or the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B can enter only when hitting right). When passing, when the handle 182 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, the maximum rotatable angle of the handle 182), or when the single-shot button 193 of the handle 182 is pressed, the right-handed display in the prior instruction effect is the effect display device. It is desirable to erase from 1600.

Although FIG. 181 has described an example in which the prior instruction effect is executed in the hit variation, the prior instruction effect may be executed in the out-of-order variation. However, if the pre-instructed effect is executed even in the case of the missed variation, the pre-instructed effect in the hit variation and the missed variation is increased so that the hit expectation when the pre-instructed effect occurs is high (for example, 50% or more). It is desirable that the distribution is decided.

In addition, it is desirable that the prior instruction effect in the out-of-range fluctuation is executed only in the time saving state. When a right-handed hit is executed according to the prior instruction effect in the out-of-order fluctuation in the normal state, it is difficult for the game ball B to enter the first starting port 2002, and the fluctuation is an out-of-range fluctuation, which causes discomfort to the player. Because it will end up.

However, if the right-handed hit is continued even during the time saving state, the rate of increase of the game ball B is slower than that during the big hit, or the game ball B decreases. Therefore, for example, the right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, a time shorter than the time from the display of the right-handed display to the determination of the symbol in the fluctuation), the right-handed display may be deleted from the effect display device 1600. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 10 shots) of game balls B are fired after the right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the hold of special figure 2 is accumulated up to the maximum (4 pieces), etc. The right-handed display may be erased from the effect display device 1600. In this way, it is desirable that there is some restriction on the display time of the right-handed display.

Further, for example, when the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum at the start of the fluctuation or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the prior instruction effect may be performed. If the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum, even if the player hits the right according to the right-handed display in the prior instruction effect, the game ball B is won by winning the game ball B at the second starting port 2004. This is because not only the payout of the game can be paid out, but also the special lottery of the special figure 2 can be received, so that a disadvantageous situation does not occur for the player.

[16-2. Judge production using multiple operation units]
Hereinafter, a judge effect using a plurality of operation units will be described. FIG. 182 (A) is a front view showing an example of a simplified configuration of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation lever, and FIG. 182 (B) is a simplified view of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation lever. It is a left side view which shows an example of the structure. For convenience of explanation, the illustration is omitted except for the configuration necessary for the explanation of the effect operation lever. In addition, the dimensions and shapes of the illustrated configurations are exaggerated and simplified.

In this chapter, the pachinko machine 1 further includes an effect operation lever 304, an effect operation lever sensor 305, and a confirmation lamp 306. The effect operation lever 304 is attached to, for example, the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and the left side of the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation lever 304 can be tilted toward the front side when viewed from the player. That is, based on the instruction displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the like, the effect progressing can be executed by the player pulling the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side.

The effect operation lever sensor 305 is attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210, for example (it is not necessary to be attached to the effect operation lever 304, that is, the effect operation lever sensor 305 is arranged in a different area from the effect operation lever 304. ing). Further, the effect operation lever sensor 305 is located on the front side of the initial position of the effect operation lever 304 (a state in which the tip of the lever faces the vertical direction), and detects that the effect operation lever 304 is tilted toward the front side. The effect operation lever sensor 305 is attached at a position where detection can be performed only when the effect operation lever 304 is tilted toward the front side by a predetermined angle (for example, 20 degrees) or more.

The confirmation lamp 306 is attached above the game board 5, for example. The confirmation lamp 306 is lit, for example, when a fluctuation is included in the fluctuation during execution or the fluctuation during suspension and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, the confirmation lamp 306 is in a state in which characters indicating that the hit such as "confirmation" has been confirmed at the time of lighting can be satisfactorily visually recognized.

183 and 184 are explanatory views showing an example of a judge effect using a plurality of operation units. FIG. 183 (A) shows a state in which reach is applied in the jackpot fluctuation. (B) is a state in which the reach effect has started, and a state in which the opening effect of the judge effect has started. In the reach production, a rock-paper-scissors game production, which is a judge production, is performed. If the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, the rock-paper-scissors production wins, and if the fluctuation is an out-of-range fluctuation, the rock-paper-scissors production loses.

(C) is a state in which the reach production is in progress, the opening production of the judge production is finished, and the main production of the judge production is started. The effect display device 1600 displays a judge effect (“rock-paper-scissors ...” in the figure) during the reach effect. (D) is a state during the reach production following (C). The effect display device 1600 displays an image for urging the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed and an image for urging the effect operation lever 304 to tilt toward the front side (that is, an image for urging an operation for a different operation unit). ..

(E) is a state during the reach effect following (D), and is a state after the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. The operation valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts from the time when the display prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The end of the operation valid period is, for example, before the timing when the winning is announced in the judge effect (the timing when the hand of the ally character and the hand of the enemy character are displayed).

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, for example, in the effect display device 1600, the image prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is deleted, and the image of the hand of the ally character and the "chance" The characters "!" And are cut in. In addition, the operation validity period is forcibly terminated. Note that the colors of the cut-in image and characters (for example, the hit expectation increases in the order of blue, green, and red) differ depending on the hit expectation (in FIG. 183, coloring is omitted). ). That is, in the judge effect, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, information indicating the hit expectation degree in the fluctuation is announced. If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed during the operation valid period, the image prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is deleted from the effect display device 1600 at the end of the operation valid period. ..

(F) is a state during the reach effect following (E), and is a state after the effect operation lever 304 is tilted toward the front side by a predetermined angle or more. After the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the effect operation lever 304 to tilt toward the front side, the effect operation lever 304 can detect the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 by a predetermined angle or more (that is, the effect operation lever sensor 305 can detect the tilt of the effect operation lever 304). When it is tilted toward you (more than a certain angle), the display is deleted on the effect display device 1600. Further, the confirmation lamp 306 is turned on only when the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation.

That is, by tilting the effect operation lever 304, a complete notification effect of winning in the fluctuation is generated. Further, the complete notification effect is performed by the confirmation lamp 306, and does not affect the winning notification effect in the judge effect. Although the operation validity period of the effect operation lever 304 is not defined (valid until the end of the fluctuation), even if the effect operation lever 304 is not tilted toward the front side, by the end of the fluctuation, It is desirable that the display prompting the tilting of the effect operating lever 304 toward the front side is erased from the effect display device 1600.

Since some players want to enjoy the complete notification without seeing the display indicating the degree of expectation of hit, even if the central pressing operation unit 303a satisfies the conditions other than the pressing, the operation validity period of the central pressing operation unit 303a is satisfied. May be forcibly terminated and the image prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a may be erased from the effect display device 1600. As the condition, for example, a specific operation on an operation unit other than the central pressing operation unit 303a and the effect operation lever 304 (for example, two rotations of the rotation operation unit 302 to the right and then one rotation to the left), first. The game ball B wins the start port 2002, the game ball B wins the second start port 2004, the hold of special figure 1 is accumulated up to the maximum (4 pieces), and the hold of special figure 2 is the maximum (4 pieces). There are things like accumulating up to.

On the other hand, since there are some players who want to enjoy the judge effect until the end of the fluctuation only by the effect showing the degree of expectation of hit without complete notification, conditions other than the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side (for example, the same as the above-mentioned condition). Even when the effect is satisfied, the operation of the effect operation lever 304 may be invalidated, and the image prompting the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side may be deleted from the effect display device 1600.

In (D), two images prompting the operation of the operation unit are displayed at the same time, but the image prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a for which the operation valid period is defined is first displayed on the effect display device 1600. Displayed, for example, when a predetermined time elapses or when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, an image displaying an image prompting the effect operation lever 304, whose operation effective period is not set, to be tilted toward the front side is displayed. It may be displayed at 1600.

On the contrary, the effect display device 1600 may display an image prompting the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side for which the operation effective period is not defined. However, in this case, the effect of urging the operation for executing the complete notification is displayed before the effect of urging the operation for the expected degree notification. Since some players are not very interested in the chance production after confirming the complete notification, an image prompting the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is displayed after the image prompting the tilting of the production operation lever 304 toward the front side is displayed. Is shorter than, for example, the time from the start of the main effect of the judge effect (FIG. 183 (C)) to the display of the image urging the effect operation lever 304 to tilt toward the front side (for example). (Within 3 seconds) is desirable. Further, for the same reason, it is desirable that the tilting of the effect operating lever 304 toward the front side is not a necessary condition for displaying an image prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a.

The period for displaying the image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a does not necessarily have to coincide with the operation valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, it is desirable that the beginning of the period is before the beginning of the operation validity period, and that the end of the period is after the end of the operation validity period. Further, it is desirable that the length of the display period of the image is secured, for example, 5 seconds or more.

Further, the display time of the image prompting the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side may be longer or shorter than the display time of the image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Further, the display time may be set so that the longer the hit is, the higher the expectation is, or it may be fixed (that is, the display time does not depend on the special lottery result). In addition, when the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, the complete notification effect is executed when the effect operation lever 304 is operated without displaying an image prompting the effect operation lever 304 to tilt toward the front side. The announcement effect itself may be a hidden effect.

In (D), the two images prompting the operation of the operation unit are displayed at non-overlapping positions on the effect display device 1600, but they may be displayed at overlapping positions. In this case, the display priority of the image that urges the central pressing operation unit 303a, which has an operation effective period, to be pressed, is set to the display priority of the image that urges the effect operation lever 304, which has an operation effective period, to be tilted toward the front side. It is better to raise it (for example, display it on the front side).

Further, the image prompting the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side for which the operation validity period is not defined may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. As the specific condition, the hold of the special figure 1 is not accumulated to the maximum, the hold of the special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum, and the like. If the hold of the special symbol change is not accumulated to the maximum, even if the game ball B is left hit while operating the effect operation lever 304 according to the display, the over-winning to the starting port ( Such a condition is set because it takes time for the game ball B to enter the start port corresponding to the special symbol change in the state where the hold of the special symbol change is accumulated to the maximum. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an opportunity for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

Further, for example, when the condition (detection by the effect operation lever sensor 305) that can be achieved based on the operation of the effect operation lever 304 is satisfied, the effect operation lever for which the operation validity period is not defined is satisfied. It is not necessary to display an image that encourages the 304 to tilt toward the front side. The effect operation lever sensor 305 detects the hit fluctuation in which an image prompting the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side is scheduled to be displayed before the display of the image. In that case, the confirmation lamp 306 may be turned on without displaying the image.

Further, if the player recognizes that the display effect of the image prompting the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side is not executed when the hold of the special symbol change is accumulated in this way, the player wins an over prize. It is possible to proceed with the game so as not to generate the above, and thus reduce the chance of suffering a disadvantage.

Further, the display timing of the image prompting the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side may differ depending on the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Specifically, for example, the smaller the number of holds, the earlier the display start timing of the image. Further, the image prompting the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side may be set to be displayed only during the fluctuation of the advantageous state (during the probable change state or the time saving state).

In the example of FIG. 183, the image of the effect operation lever 304 is displayed, but as described above, the effect operation lever 304 must be tilted toward the front side by an angle or more that can be detected by the effect operation lever sensor 305. , The confirmation lamp 306 does not light even if the hit fluctuates. Therefore, in order to make the player understand how much the effect operation lever 304 should be tilted, an image of a unit equipped with the effect operation lever sensor 305 (effect operation) in place of or in addition to the image of the effect operation lever 304. (Including the image of only the lever sensor 305) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

It should be noted that the condition that can be achieved based on the operation of the operation means (detection by the effect operation lever sensor 305) is not displayed, but the operation means (effect operation lever 304) actually operated by the player is not displayed. Needless to say, the concept is not limited to the effect operation lever 304 and its sensor. For example, a condition that can be achieved based on a predetermined operation performed on an operation medium (for example, the central pressing operation unit 303a, the handle 182, etc.) that can be operated by a player different from the effect operation lever 304. (Display indicating how far the center pressing operation unit 303a should be pressed, how far the handle 182 should be turned, where the target should be hit, etc.) may be displayed.

FIG. 184 (G) shows a state in which the reach is being produced, which is a continuation of FIG. 183 (F). A ally character has won a rock-paper-scissors game against an enemy character. Also in (G), the confirmation lamp 306 remains lit. (H) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot has stopped, and a display indicating that the jackpot has been won (“Big hit! Congratulations!” In the figure) is displayed. Further, also in (H), the confirmation lamp 306 remains lit. The confirmation lamp 306 is turned off at a predetermined timing after the symbol is confirmed and until the start of the big hit game.

[17. How to count the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening in the winning round]
185 and 186 are schematic views showing an example of the internal structure of the second large winning opening 2006. In this chapter, the internal structure of the second prize opening 2006 will be described, but the internal structure of the first prize opening 2005 may be the same. In the second big winning opening 2006, for example, a first game ball detection switch 2080, a second game ball detection switch 2082, and a crune member 2084 are provided.

The first game ball detection switch 2080 is a switch that detects the passage of the game ball B, and is provided, for example, directly below the second large winning opening 2006. The first game ball detection switch 2080 is, for example, a through-type proximity switch having a passage hole 2091 through which only one game ball B can pass.

The crune member 2084 is provided below the first game ball detection switch 2080. The crune member 2084 has, for example, a dish-like shape in which the central portion is recessed downward, and the dish surface has an area in which a plurality of game balls B (for example, five) can stay. Further, for example, as in the example of FIG. 186, the crune member 2084 has three passage holes 2085 through which the game ball B can pass in the center of the plate surface. Note that FIG. 185 shows an example of a state in which the second major winning opening 2006 is not open, and FIG. 186 shows a ball entering the second major winning opening 2006 when the second major winning opening 2006 is opened. An example of a state in which the three game balls B staying on the crune member 2084 is shown.

The second game ball detection switch 2082 is a switch that detects the passage of the game ball B, and is provided, for example, directly below the passage hole 2085 of the crune member 2084. The second game ball detection switch 2082 is, for example, a through-type proximity switch having a passage hole 2083 through which three game balls B can pass. In the example of FIG. 185, one second game ball detection switch 2082 is provided for each of the three passage holes 2085 of the crune member 2084, but one second game ball detection switch for each of the passage holes 2085. 2082 may be provided.

In the example of FIG. 185, when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, the game ball B enters the second big winning opening 2006. After that, the game balls B pass through the passage hole 2081 of the first game ball detection switch 2080 one by one, and the first game ball detection switch 2080 detects the passage of the game ball B.

Then, the game ball B that has passed through the passage hole 2081 of the first game ball detection switch 2080 moves onto the crune member 2084. Since the central portion of the dish surface of the crune member 2084 is recessed, the game ball B moves to the central portion of the crune member 2084 while staying in the crune member 2084, and passes through any of the three passage holes 2085. Then, the game ball B that has passed through the passage hole 2085 of the crune member 2084 passes through the passage hole 2083 of the second game ball detection switch 2082, and the second game ball detection switch 2082 detects the passage of the game ball B.

When the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in each round of the big hit or small hit game, the main control MPU has passed a predetermined time from the opening of the second big winning opening 2006, or the second big winning opening 2006 When it is determined that at least one of the specified number of game balls B has entered the second major winning opening 2006 from the opening, the second major winning opening 2006 is closed and the round is ended.

Hereinafter, an example of a method of counting the number of balls B entered into the second major winning opening 2006 in each round by the main control MPU will be described. The main control MPU counts the number of game balls detected by the first game ball detection switch 2080 and the second game ball detection switch 2082 in each round. Further, the main control MPU determines the payout of the game ball B according to the number of detections by the second game ball detection switch 2082.

When the main control MPU determines that the number of game balls B detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 after the start of the round has reached the specified number, the main control MPU closes the second large winning opening 2006. Further, the main control MPU calculates the difference obtained by subtracting the number of detections by the second game ball detection switch 2082 from the number of detections by the first game ball detection switch 2080 since the start of the round.

After closing the second grand prize opening 2006, the main control MPU verifies whether or not the value of the difference is zero. When the value of the difference is not zero in the main control MPU (that is, there is a game ball that has passed the first game ball detection switch 2080 but has not passed the second game ball detection switch since the start of the round). If it is determined, even if the next round starts and the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, the number of detected game balls B by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the newly started round is counted. Do not start and continue to calculate the value of the difference in the previous round.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that the value of the difference is zero, the calculation of the value of the difference in the round is completed, and when a new round is started, a new round is started. The count of the detection of the game ball B by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the new round is started, and the difference between the number detected by the first game ball detection switch 2080 in the new round minus the number detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082. Start calculating the value.

The above-mentioned detection number counting process of the game ball B in the round will be described with reference to a specific example. For example, consider the case where the specified number in each round is 10. For example, when the main control MPU determines that the number of game balls B detected in the first round by the second game ball detection switch 2082 has reached 10, the second major winning opening 2006 is closed. However, since there is a time lag between the start of the first round and the closing of the second major winning opening 2006 after the tenth game ball enters the second major winning opening 2006, in the first round There is a possibility that more than the specified number of game balls B will enter the second major winning opening 2006.

For example, after the number of detected game balls B in the first round of the second game ball detection switch 2082 reaches 10, and before the closing of the second big winning opening 2006, one game ball B becomes the second big winning opening. Suppose you entered the ball in 2006. That is, it is assumed that 11 game balls B have entered the second major winning opening 2006 by the time the second major winning opening 2006 is closed in the first round. Further, it is assumed that a predetermined second round interval elapses while the one game ball B stays in the crune member 2084, and the second round, which is the next round of the first round, has started.

In this case, at the start of the second round, the difference obtained by subtracting the number detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 from the number detected by the first game ball detection switch 2080 after the start of the first round is 1. At the start of the second round, the main control MPU does not start counting the number of game balls B detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the second round, and continues to calculate the difference value in the first round. However, the main control MPU starts counting the number of detections by the first game ball detection switch 2080 from the start of the second round.

Then, when one game ball is detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 after the start of the second round, the difference becomes zero, so that the main control MPU ends the calculation of the value of the difference in the first round. , The count of the specified number by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the second round, and the number of detections by the second game ball detection switch 2082 from the number detected by the first game ball detection switch 2080 after the start of the second round. Start calculating the value of the subtracted difference.

That is, in this example, 11 game balls B have entered by the time the second big winning opening 2006 is closed in the first round, but the number of game balls B detected by the second game ball detection switch by 2082 is 11. The count of the number of detections by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the second round is not started until the number is reached. Therefore, all 11 game balls B that have entered the second major winning opening in the first round can be paid out (so-called over-winning), and more than the specified number (10) of games are also played in the second round. You can get a payout for the entry of ball B.

On the other hand, in the above example, if the count of the specified number of game balls B in the second round starts at the same time as the start of the second round, one game ball B that should have been over-winned in the first round Is counted as the specified number in the second round, so that the number of game balls B that the player can acquire is reduced as compared with the above-mentioned example.

As described above, the main control MPU is operated by the second game ball detection switch 2082 from the number of detections by the first game ball detection switch 2080 after the round starts after the second big winning opening 2006 is closed. It is verified whether or not the value of the difference obtained by subtracting the number of detections is zero, but only when the round interval of a predetermined second has elapsed and the verification determines that the value of the difference has become zero, the following You may want to start the round. That is, even if it is determined that the round interval of a predetermined second has elapsed after the closing of the second major winning opening 2006, the main control MPU does not start the next round until it is determined that the value of the difference becomes zero.

As described above, according to the counting method of the game balls B explained in this chapter, when the specified number or more of the game balls B enter the second major winning opening 2006 in each round, all the game balls B that have entered the round are concerned. You can get the game ball B as a payout in, that is, it will always be treated as an over prize.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1600 Production display device 2006 Second prize opening 2080 First game ball detection switch 2082 Second game ball detection switch 2084 Crune member 3000 Back unit 3300 Upper front movable effect Unit 3301 Unit base 3302 Upper front drive motor (drive motor)
3303 1st link rod 3304 2nd link rod (link member)
3305 Upper stopper 3306 Lower stopper 3350 Upper front movable decorative body 3351 Central decorative body (main decorative body)
3352 First protruding decorative body (sub-decorative body unit)
3352a First protruding decorative part (sub-decorative body)
3352b First connecting rod (connecting member)
3352c Link mounting part 3353 Second protruding decorative body (sub-decorative body unit)
3353a Second protruding decorative part (sub-decorative body)
3353b Second connecting rod (connecting member)
3353c link mounting part

Claims (1)

Lottery means to draw lots for winning based on the establishment of starting conditions,
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
The production execution means that controls the execution of the production,
With a light emitting part,
The effect executing means controls the stop effect of the decorative symbol by using a temporary stop effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol and a definite display effect executed in a state where the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped.
Wherein without emitting the light emitting portion in a period from the timing became the confirmation display effect from the temporary stop demonstration to the first hour, from said temporary stop demonstration period until the first time duration elapse is after the completion make it possible to emit the light emitting portion in a state in which the confirmation display effect from the timing became the determined display effect has passed the second time is executed,
Until the lapse of the first hour, the decorative symbol continues to be fixed and stopped.
Wherein said light emitting portion from the timing became the confirmation display effect from the temporary stop demonstration emitted upon lapse of the second period of time, the confirmation that the elapsed a third time from the timing became the confirmation display effect from the temporary stop demonstration In the state where the display effect is being executed, it is possible to change from the light emission mode when the second time elapses from the timing of the final display effect and the light emission is started to a different light emission mode.
It is possible to adjust the amount of light in a state where the final display effect is being executed after the second time has passed from the timing when the temporary stop effect is changed to the final display effect after the period up to the first time has expired. Has been
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to make silence while the final display effect is being executed.

Images